Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout01 29513 WCC Rest Reno - Specs 2023-12-21 Waterloo Convention Center at Sullivan Brothers Plaza co N O N N N r W Q 0 W D U) ConventionWaterloo Waterloo, Iowa Project Manual For: Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. December No.: • OWNER: FROM: Architecture City of Waterloo ISG - Waterloo Office Engineering Noel Anderson 335 Cedar Street,Suite 200 Environmental 715 Mulberry St Waterloo, Iowa 50701 Planning Waterloo, IA 50703 Contact: Nathan Compton SGlnc.com 319.291.0141 Phone: 319.234.1515 Email: Nathan.Compton@ISGlnc.com N O N N N r W Q O W Z) U) SECTION 00 0105 CERTIFICATIONS PAGE WATERLOO CONVENTION CENTER RESTROOM RENOVATION WATERLOO, IOWA ISG NO. 23-29513 1 hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct ��► supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed ;= OFESSION,14 Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. 'NATHANIEL J. s`� , �— 12-21-2023 coM17TON Nathaniel J. Compton, AIA Date 07016 License No.- 07016 Date Issued: 12-08-2014 /OWP My License Renewal Date is June 30, 2024 Sections covered by this seal: o N Division 00, 01, 03 - 14. N LU 0 LU Z) I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission U) U) described below was prepared by me or under my direct `y�SSilll+fr�� supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed OFEss1oN�ZEngineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. 12-21-2023 JASON E. J n E. Hoehn, PAY. Date — HOEHN 16140 = License No.: 16140 Date Issued: 03-27-2002 * * My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2023 !O W A Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, 03 - 06. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 0105 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Q +o [ZZ ngineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Jr s �o F"' ADAM cZ lrl 12-21-2023 J WiPULSON ; m W. PuIs, P.E. Date P23206 icense No.: 23206 License Issued: 01-04-2016 hW My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2023 Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, and 21 - 23. I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission N described below was prepared by me or under my direct N supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed N 00ESSf ok Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. w : p • .•�Z ' �-.-----12-21-2023 0 NELSON `�:• MICHAEL D. = Michael D. Nelson, Pw .E. Date W NELSON Z �_ D • 0425 •:�,�: License No.: 20425 Date Issued: 04-15-2011 u ••'•••••'• My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2024 Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, 26 - 28. DATED THE 21ST DAY OF DECEMBER 2023 END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 0105 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS A. 00 0000 - Project Manual Cover B. 00 0105 - Certifications Page C. 00 0110 -Table of Contents D. 00 1113 - Notice to Bidders E. 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders F. 00 3100 -Available Project Information 1. Attachment-- Sex Offender Acknowledgment Form G. 00 3113 - Bidding and Construction Schedule H. 00 4100 - Bid Form 1. Attachment-- Bidder Status Form I. 00 7200 - General Conditions 1. Attachment--AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition J. 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions K. 00 7380 - Special Conditions of the Contract for Construction SPECIFICATIONS 2.01 DIVISION 01 --GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures co B. 01 2100 -Allowances N C. 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements 1. Attachment-- Shop Drawing Submittal Form 2. Attachment-- Requirements for Electronically Submitted Shop Drawings w D. 01 4000 - Quality Requirements o E. 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls w D F. 01 6000 - Product Requirements U) 1. Attachment-- Substitution Request Form G. 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements H. 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals 2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 2.03 DIVISION 03 --CONCRETE A. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 2.04 DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY A. 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting B. 04 2000 - Unit Masonry 2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS A. 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing B. 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications 2.06 DIVISION 06 --WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES A. 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry B. 064100 -Architectural Wood Casework 2.07 DIVISION 07 --THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION A. 07 8400 - Firestopping Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 0110 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. 07 9200 -Joint Sealants 2.08 DIVISION 08 --OPENINGS A. 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames B. 08 3100 -Access Doors and Panels C. 08 7100 - Door Hardware D. 08 8300 - Mirrors 2.09 DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES A. 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation B. 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies C. 09 3000 -Tiling D. 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring E. 09 6623 - Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring F. 09 7200 -Wall Coverings G. 09 9123 - Interior Painting 2.10 DIVISION 10 --SPECIALTIES A. 10 1400 - Signage B. 10 2113.19- Plastic Toilet Compartments C. 10 2123 - Cubicle Curtains and Track D. 10 2800 -Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories E. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties co N F. 10 5113 - Metal Lockers N G. 10 5617 -Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving N N 2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 2.12 DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS w A. 12 3600 - Countertops o 2.13 DIVISION 13 --SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION D 2.14 DIVISION 14 --CONVEYING EQUIPMENT U) 2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION 2.16 DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING A. 22 0010 - Basic Mechanical Plumbing Requirements B. 22 0050 - Selective Plumbing Demolition C. 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment D. 22 0719 - Plumbing Piping Insulation E. 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping F. 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties G. 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures 2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) A. 23 0010 - Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements B. 23 0050 - Selective Mechanical Demolition C. 23 0593 -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC D. 23 0713 - Duct Insulation E. 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings F. 23 3300 -Air Duct Accessories G. 23 3700 -Air Outlets and Inlets Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 0110 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.18 DIVISION 25 --INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 2.19 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL A. 26 0010 - Basic Electrical Requirements B. 26 0505 - Selective Demolition for Electrical C. 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables D. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems E. 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems F. 26 0533.13- Conduit for Electrical Systems G. 26 0533.16- Boxes for Electrical Systems H. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems I. 26 0583 -Wiring Connections J. 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices K. 26 2416 - Panelboards L. 26 2726 -Wiring Devices M. 26 5100 - Interior Lighting 2.20 DIVISION 27 --COMMUNICATIONS 2.21 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY A. 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm 2.22 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK 2.23 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS co 2.24 DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES N 2.25 DIVISION 34 --TRANSPORTATION N N 2.26 DIVISION 40 -- PROCESS INTEGRATION END OF SECTION w Q 0 w D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 0110 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 00 1113 NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE OF BID LETTING FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF WATERLOO CONVENTION CENTER — RESTROOM RENOVATION 2024 INTERIOR RENOVATION PROJECT IN WATERLOO, IOWA AND THE TAKING OF BIDS FOR SUCH CONSTRUCTION. Notice is hereby given that the City of Waterloo of Waterloo Council, Iowa, will receive bids at Waterloo City Hall until the 25th day of January 2024 at 1:00 p.m., for the Waterloo Convention Center — Restroom Remodel. Bids shall be submitted to Cynthia Shepherd at Waterloo City Hall, 715 Mulberry Street, Waterloo IA 50701. Bids will be publicly opened and tabulated on said day and hour and will then be acted on by the Council. The Council will give consent on selected bidder at their meeting on the 5th day of February 2024 at 5:30 p.m.. Meetings are held at the Waterloo City Hall, Council Chambers 715 Mulberry Street, Waterloo, Iowa 50701. Project Scope: Interior renovation of 4 existing public restrooms to increase fixture count and update finishes. In addition, a family restroom will be added along with small multi-purpose room to the existing building, demolition of existing elements to achieve new work and other related work indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. A prebid conference will be held on the 9th day of January 2024 at 1:00 p.m. at the Waterloo City Hall 715 Mulberry Street, Waterloo Iowa 50701 with contractors and answer any questions. Site visit to follow to review the building and site conditions of the project. A more detailed description of the kinds and approximate quantities of materials and types of construction for which bids will be received are set forth in the Bidding Documents prepared by ISG, Inc. of Waterloo, Iowa, which, together with the proposed form of contract, have heretofore been approved by the City of N Waterloo and are now on file for public examination and are by this reference made part hereof as though N fully set out and incorporated herein. N N All sealed bids in connection therewith shall be submitted to the City of Waterloo on or before the time herein set for letting. All proposals shall be made on official proposal forms furnished by the Lu Architect/Engineer and must be enclosed in a separate sealed envelope and plainly identified and Q addressed to the City of Waterloo. If a bid is to be mailed, the bid envelope shall be sealed in a regular 0 mailing envelope. FAX and E-mail Bids will not be accepted. The Owner reserves the right to reject any D or all bids and to waive informalities and to hold and consider the bids for 45 days after the date of the bid U) opening. The contract will be awarded to the lowest, responsive, responsible bidder. — Each proposal shall be accompanied by a bid bond, certified check, cashier's check or certified share draft in a separate sealed envelope, clearly marked "Bid Bond" or Bid Security", in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the total amount of the proposal. The certified or cashier's check shall be drawn on a bank in Iowa or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States of America, or the certified share draft shall be drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States and payable to the City of Waterloo. Said check or share draft may be cashed, or the bid bond forfeited as liquidated damages in the event the successful bidder fails or refuses to enter into a contract within ten (10) days of issuance of a Notice of Award and post bond satisfactory to the Council insuring the faithful fulfillment of the contract and maintenance of said improvements as required by law. The bid bond should be executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa and must not contain any conditions either in the body or as an endorsement thereon. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a corporate surety bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent(100%)of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by The City of Waterloo, Waterloo, Iowa, and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, the payment for materials used in the project and the maintenance of said improvements in good repair for not less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance of said improvements by The City of Waterloo. Payment of the cost of said project will be made from such cash funds of The City of Waterloo as may be legally used for said purpose at the discretion of The City of Waterloo. NTB-1 The Contractor will be paid ninety-five per cent (95%) of the Architect's/Engineer's estimate of the value of acceptable work completed at the end of the preceding month. Final payment will be made not less than thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by The City of Waterloo, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa. No such final payment will be due until the Contractor certifies to The City of Waterloo that the materials, labor, and services involved in the final estimate have been paid for in accordance with the requirements stated in the specifications. The City of Waterloo, Waterloo, Iowa is exempt from paying Sales and Use Tax and will supply Contractor with an "Iowa Sales Tax Exemption Certificate" and an authorization letter to allow the Contractor to buy equipment and material for the project without paying Sales and Use tax. The work shall commence by May 6, 2024 after receipt by the contractor of a written notice to proceed and shall be substantially completed on or before the 30th day of August 2024, subject to any changes in the contract period as provided for in these specifications and granted by The City of Waterloo. The Work on shall be finally completed by, and ready for final payment, on or before the 13th day of September 2024, subject to any changes in the contract period as provided for in these specifications and granted by The City of Waterloo. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa. In accordance with Iowa statutes, a resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country if that state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state or foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to co bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to N 0 bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The preference allowed shall be equal to the N preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. In the instance of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident bidder shall apply the same resident N labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. Lu Q Liquidated damages in the amount of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000) per calendar day will be assessed Lu w for each day that the work shall remain uncompleted after the end of the contract period, with due D allowance for extensions of the contract period due to conditions beyond control of the Contractor. U) Failure to submit a fully completed Bidder Status Form with the bid may result in the bid being deemed nonresponsive and rejected. Plans and specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by the Architect/Engineer. These plans and specifications, and the proceedings of The City of Waterloo referring to and defining said improvements, are hereby made a part of this Notice and the proposed contract by reference, and the proposed contract shall be executed to comply therewith. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of contract are now on file for examination by bidders. Paper copies may also be obtained from through Rapids Reproductions, 6201 Chancellor Dr., Cedar Falls, IA 50613, or calling 1-800-383-1223, upon deposit of one-hundred fifty dollars ($150.00)which shall be refunded if plans and specifications are returned to Rapid Reproductions no later than fourteen (14) days following award of project. If the plans and specifications are not returned within the allotted time and in a reusable condition, the deposit shall be forfeited. Please call ahead to make sure that bidding documents are ready to pick up when you arrive. Drawings, specifications, and other Bidding Documents may also be obtained online at www.questcdn.com. If you do not already have a free membership, you may sign up for one to gain access to the documents. The QuestCDN eBidDoc number is 8899192. There is no fee to access a pdf copy of the documents online. Documents are viewable at www.questcdn.com and www.ISGinc.com free of charge. NTB-2 Any bidder or equipment supplier whose firm or affiliate is listed in the GSA publication "List of Parties Excluded from Federal Procurement and Non-procurement Programs" will be prohibited from the bidding process. Anyone submitting a bid who is listed in this publication will be determined to be a non- responsive bidder in accordance with 40 CFR Part 31. Published upon order of The City of Waterloo. City of Waterloo BY/s/ Quentin Hart, Mayor ATTEST: BY/s/ CO N O N N N r W Q O W Z) U) U) NTB-3 This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) NTB-4 SECTION 00 2113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUMMARY 1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. Advertisement 1. Bid Submission 2. Contract Time B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents 1. Definitions 2. Contract Documents Identification 3. Availability 4. Examination 5. Creating a level bidding environment 6. Inquiries/Addenda C. Site Assessment 1. Site Examination 2. Prebid Conference D. Qualifications 1. Subcontractors/Suppliers/Others E. Bid Submission 1. Submission Procedure 2. Bid Ineligibility F. Bid Enclosures/Requirements co 1. Security Deposit o 2. Performance Assurance 3. Bid Form Requirements N 4. Sales and Use Taxes 5. Bid Form Signature w 6. Additional Bid Information 7. Permits, Fees, and Utility Costs o G. Offer Acceptance/Rejection D 1. Duration of Offer U) 2. Acceptance of Offer 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions: ADVERTISEMENT 2.01 BID SUBMISSION A. Refer to Section 00 1113 for bid submission information. B. Offers submitted after the time indicated in Section 00 1113 shall be returned to the bidder unopened. C. Offers will be opened immediately after the time for receipt of bids as indicated in Section 00 1113. 2.02 CONTRACT TIME A. Perform the Work within the time stated in Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 3.01 DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form Bid securities identified. B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda. C. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 2113 - Page 1 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form. 3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION A. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 23-29513 with contents as identified in the Table of Contents of the drawings and specifications. 3.03 AVAILABILITY A. Contractors and suppliers that obtain plans from QuestCDN will be added to the Plan Holders List. Obtaining the construction documents from QuestCDN will entitle you to all addenda and updates prior to the project bid date. 1. Contractors and suppliers who access the plans from a builder exchange or from another plan holder will not be added to the Plan Holders List. They will be responsible for periodically checking back with their original plan source for any addenda that may have been issued. 2. Contractors and suppliers who access the plans from a builders exchange or from another plan holder may receive an e-mailed copy of the current Plan Holders List, but only at a maximum of once a week. Plan holders lists may be viewed and obtained on the QuestCDN website free of charge. 3. Plan holders who download plans from QuestCDN will receive addenda notifications from the QuestCDN web site via email. They will be responsible for downloading addenda from the QuestCDN web site and they will not receive mailed or e-mailed copies of the addenda. B. Documents are viewable at both www.questcdn.com and www.ISGInc.com free of charge. C. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes. 3.04 EXAMINATION co A. The following builder exchanges have been notified of plan availability. It is at the sole N discretion of each exchange to acquire the plans and make available to bidders. N N 1. Minnesota Exchanges a. Albert Lea Builders Exchange w b. Austin Builders Exchange Q c. Duluth Builders Exchange 0 d. Hibbing Builders Exchange D e. iSgFt&AGC of MN Planroom Partnership U) f. Mankato Builders Exchange Ln g. Minneapolis Builders Exchange h. Builders Exchange of Rochester i. St. Cloud Builders Exchange j. St. Paul Builders Exchange k. South Central Builders Exchange I. Southwest Builders Exchange m. Willmar Builders Exchange (Mid Minnesota) 2. Iowa Exchanges a. North Iowa Builders Exchange b. Master Builders of Iowa 3. Wisconsin Exchanges a. LaCrosse Builders Exchange b. Milwaukee Builders Exchange c. Wausau Builders Exchange d. Fox Valley Plan Room e. Builders Exchange of Wisconsin f. Northwest Regional Builders Exchange g. AGC of Greater Milwaukee Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 2113 - Page 2 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 4. North Dakota a. Bismarck-Mandan Builders Exchange b. Fargo-Moorhead Builders Exchange c. Grand Forks Builders Exchange d. Minot Builders Exchange e. Williston Builders Exchange 5. South Dakota a. Aberdeen Builders Exchange b. Plains Builders Exchange (Sioux Falls) c. Sioux Falls Builders Exchange 6. Nebraska a. Omaha Builders Exchange b. Lincoln Builders Bureau 7. Illinois a. ePlan Online Plan Room 8. Missouri a. ePlan Online Plan Room 9. National a. Reed Construction Data b. McGraw Hill Construction Plan Room c. MEDA Minority Contractors Plan Room co d. NAMC (National Association of Minority Contractors) C) N e. Bidclerk N N r B. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the Lu documents be incomplete. C. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents. o 3.05 CREATING A LEVEL BIDDING ENVIRONMENT D A. Drawings and specifications are complementary and do not create a hierarchy. Ln B. By submitting a bid, bidders agree that they have reviewed, in detail, all documents issued for bidding purposes. C. The following will not entitle a contractor to a change order increasing the overall project cost after the project has been awarded: 1. Selectively choosing less significant content from the drawings or specifications where conflicting information is evident. 2. Disregarding content that only appears in one part of the Bidding Documents. D. A written request for clarification during the bidding process will result in an addendum being issued to resolve such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Bidding Documents therefore creating a level bidding environment for all bidders. 3.06 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA A. Direct questions to the Architect's Representative: 1. Nathan Compton, telephone: 319.234.1515, email: Nathan.Compton@ISGlnc.com B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of Contract Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party. D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known recipients. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 2113 - Page 3 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.07 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01 6000-Product Requirements for additional requirements. SITE ASSESSMENT 4.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid. 4.02 PREBID CONFERENCE A. Refer to Section 00 1113 for prebid conference information. B. All general contract and subcontract bidders and suppliers are invited. C. Representatives of Architect will be in attendance. D. Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be recorded in an Addendum, issued to Bid Document recipients. QUALIFICATIONS 5.01 HEATH SAFETY PROTOCOLS A. The Contractor shall comply, and require all subcontractors on the Project to comply, with all applicable provisions of the Executive Order on Ensuring Adequate COVID-19 Safety Protocols for Federal Contractors and any guidance for contractor or subcontractor workplace locations published by the Safer Federal Workforce Task Force. 5.02 SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS/OTHERS A. Owner reserves the right to reject a proposed subcontractor for reasonable cause. B. Refer to General Conditions. BID SUBMISSION N 6.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE N A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time N prescribed. "' B. Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed and sealed with the w required security in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project name and Owner's name on the outside. o C. Improperly completed information, irregularities in bid bond, may be cause not to open the Bid D Form envelope and declare the bid invalid or informal. U) D. An abstract summary of submitted bids will be made available to all bidders following bid opening. 6.02 BID INELIGIBILITY A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the Owner, be declared unacceptable. B. Bid Forms, Appendices, and enclosures that are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of Owner, be declared unacceptable. C. Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of Owner, be waived. BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS 7.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT A. Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit as follows: 1. Bid Bond of a sum no less than 5 percent of the Bid Amount on AIA A310 Bid Bond Form. B. Endorse the Bid Bond in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the principal (Contractor) and surety. C. The security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance and Payment Bond(s) by the accepted bidder. D. Include the cost of bid security in the Bid Amount. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 2113 - Page 4 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. After a bid has been accepted, all securities will be returned to the respective bidders . F. If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned. 7.02 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE A. Accepted Bidder: Provide a Performance and Payment bond as described in Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. B. Include the cost of Performance and Payment Bonds in the Bid Amount. 7.03 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form. 7.04 SALES AND USE TAXES A. The Owner is exempt from sales and use tax and will work with the contractor on related documents and procedures after award. 7.05 BID FORM SIGNATURE A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows: 1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal. 2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature. 3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with the Bid Form in the bid envelope. co 4. Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their o respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the requirements of a Partnership. N N 7.06 ADDITIONAL BID INFORMATION A. Submit the following Supplements 24 hours after bid submission if you are the apparent low bidder or as requested to do so by the Architect or the Owner: Q 0 1. List of Subcontractors: Include the names of all Subcontractors and the portions of the w Work they will perform. D 2. Proposed Schedule of Values: Identify the Bid Amount allotted to each portion of the U) Work. 7.07 PERMITS, FEES, AND UTILITY COSTS A. The General Contractor is responsible for contacting the city and state in which the project is to be constructed to obtain a building permit, other fees and permits, and coordinating with subcontractors who are to include fees and permits in their bid amount. Include the cost of building permit, and other fees and permits in the Base Bid amount. Other fees and permits may include but are not limited to: 1. Plan Review. 2. City Water and Sewer Access. 3. Parkland Dedications. 4. Inspection. 5. Connection. 6. All other similar types of permits and fees. B. The General Contractor is responsible for contacting, or requiring their subcontractors to contact, the local utility companies to design and install temporary and permanent utilities including service meters. Include the costs of design and installation in the Base Bid. 7.08 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATES A. Bids will be evaluated based on the lowest proposed base bid or on the lowest proposed bid fee calculated by the combined sums of the base bid and selection of the alternates chosen by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to choose either the lowest base bid alone, or the lowest base bid in combination with the alternates in the order listed. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 2113 - Page 5 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION 8.01 DURATION OF OFFER A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for the number of days after the bid closing date as indicated in Section 00 1113. 8.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. B. After acceptance by Owner, Architect on behalf of Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a written Notice of Award. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 2113 - Page 6 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 00 3100 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DOCUMENTS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER A. Sex Offender Acknowledgment and Certification Form; Each vendor, supplier, contractor, or professional services provider shall complete this form and return to the Owner before the Company may involve the presence of the Company's employees upon the real property of the school(s) of the District. Review this form in its entirety. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 3100 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) ACKNOWLEDGMENT AND CERTIFICATION ("Company") is providing services to the Waterloo Convention Center as a vendor, supplier, contractor, or professional services provider or is operating or managing the operations of a vendor, supplier, contractor or professional service provider. The services provided by the Company may involve the presence of the Company's employees upon the real property of the Waterloo Convention Center. The Company acknowledges that Iowa law prohibits a sex offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor from being present upon the real property of the Waterloo Convention Center. The Company further acknowledges that,pursuant to law, a sex offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor may not operate, manage, be employed by, or act as a contractor, vendor, supplier, provider of services or volunteer at the Waterloo Convention Center. The Company hereby certifies that no one who is an owner, operator or manager of the Company has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor. The Company further co agrees that it shall not permit any person who is a sex offender convicted of a sex offense N against a minor to provide any services to the Waterloo Convention Center in accordance N with the prohibitions set forth above. LU This Acknowledgment and Certification is to be construed under the laws of the o State of Iowa. If any portion hereof is held invalid, the balance of the document shall, j notwithstanding, continue in full legal force and effect. co In signing this Acknowledgment and Certification, the person signing on behalf of the Company hereby acknowledges that he/she has read this entire document, that he/she understands its terms, and that he/she not only has the authority to sign the document on behalf of the Company, but has signed it knowingly and voluntarily. Dated: Name By: Printed Name: Title: 00995224-1\18929-01 N O N N N r W Q O W Z) U) SECTION 00 3113 BIDDING AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE WATERLOO CONVENTION CENTER RESTROOM RENOVATION WATERLOO, IOWA ISG NO. 23-29513 Friday, December 22, 2023 Send out Notice to Bidders. Tuesday, January 09, 2024 Prebid meeting, walk-through. 1:00 p.m. Friday, January 25, 2024 Receive Bids before 1:00 p.m. Monday, February 05, 2024 Estimated date to issue Notice of Award. Monday, February 05, 2024 Estimated date to execute contract and issue Notice to Proceed. Monday, March 04, 2024 Estimated preconstruction meeting date. Monday, May 06, 2024 Estimated commence construction date. cry N O N Substantial completion, perform final walk through and N Friday, August 30, 2024 inspection with Owner and Architect. Owner can c14 occupy. w Friday, September 13, 2024 Final Completion. o LU D U) END OF SECTION Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 3113 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 00 4100 BID FORM WATERLOO CONVENTION CENTER RESTROOM RENOVATION WATERLOO, IOWA ISG NO. 23-29513 Submitted By (Company Name) Date Ladies and Gentlemen: The undersigned being familiar with the conditions; having made a field inspection and investigation I/we deem necessary; having studied the Plans and Specifications for the work, and being familiar with all factors and other conditions affecting the work and cost thereof, hereby propose to furnish all labor, tools, materials, skills, equipment, building permit, other fees and permits, and all else necessary to completely construct the project in accordance with the Plans and Specifications as prepared by ISG, 335 Cedar Street, Suite 200, Waterloo, Iowa 50701 for the prices as entered on the following pages of this proposal. I/We hereby certify that I am/we are the only person, persons, firm or corporation interested in this proposal as principals and that it is made without collusion with any person, firm or corporation. It is understood that the following Bid/Bids shall include all necessary materials, labor, N supervision, machinery, equipment, tools, bracing, false work and other means of construction, N including all necessary tests incidental to such installation. N I/We guarantee all of the work performed under this contract shall be done in accordance with "' the drawings and specifications, in a good and workmanlike manner, and to redo or repair any w work which may be rejected due to defective materials or workmanship, prior to the final acceptance of the project, by the Project Architect and the Owner. o I/We propose to begin work and to prosecute the work so as to complete the same as w indicated. U) U) BASE BID: Interior renovation of 4 existing public restrooms to increase fixture count and update finishes. In addition, a family restroom will be added along with small multi-purpose room to the existing building, demolition of existing elements to achieve new Work and other related Work indicated in the Drawings and Specifications for the Sum of: Dollars ALLOWANCE(S): Include in the Base Bid: $30,000.00, Contingency Allowance. ALLOWANCE(S): Include in the Base Bid: $3,000.00, CAD/As-built Allowance. CONTRACT TIME: If this Bid is accepted, I/we will: Commence work as soon as possible after Receipt of Notice to Proceed and shall complete the Work by the time indicated per Section 00 7300- Supplementary Conditions. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 4100 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation BID SECURITY -CONTRACTS: A properly executed bid bond of a sum no less than five percent(5%) of the base bid amount or a certified check in the amount of$ equal to no less than five percent(5%) of the base bid amount accompanies this proposal. It is understood that bids may not be withdrawn for a period of 30 days after the date and time set for the opening of bids. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to retain the bid security of the bidders for a period not to exceed 30 days after the date set for the opening of bids. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OR RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM (if issued): Received Addendum No. 1, dated Received Addendum No. 2, dated Received Addendum No. 3, dated (A CORPORATION) (A LIMITED PARTNERSHIP) (A GENERAL PARTNERSHIP) (A SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP) (CIRCLE ONE OR INDICATE COMPANY OWNERSHIP STRUCTURE TYPE ABOVE) COMPANY NAME: co N O ADDRESS: N N N r W Q SUBMITTED BY: 0 LU (PRINT OR TYPE NAME) D Ln TITLE: PHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER: E-MAIL ADDRESS: SIGNATURE: END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 4100 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation Bidder Status Form To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer"Yes" or"No"for each of the following: ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. ❑ Yes ❑ No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes" for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No"to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. To be completed by resident bidders Part B My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: M N Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: N Dates: / / to / / Address: w You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: o To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C EO 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to resident bidders, resident labor force preferences or any other type of preference to bidders or laborers? E] Yes F] No 3. If you answered "Yes"to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. Firm Name: Signature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156. This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner. 309-6001 (09-15) Worksheet: Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. CO ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this o state and the statement has not been canceled. N N ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of LU cancellation has not been filed. Q 0 LU ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a D U) certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. cn ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. 309-6001 (09-15) SECTION 00 7200 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 THE GENERAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS CONTRACT ARE AS FOLLOWS A. AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, 2017 Edition, is the General Conditions between the Owner and Contractor. B. The General Conditions applicable to this contract is attached following this page. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. SECTION 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions. 1.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. Refer to document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions for amendments to these general conditions. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 7200 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) 0 Document A2010 - 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its THE OWNER: completion.The author may also have revised the text of the original (Name, legal status and address) AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates THE ARCHITECT: where the author has added (Name, legal status and address) necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. N 0 This document has important legal N consequences.Consultation with an cC14 attorney is encouraged with respect TABLE OF ARTICLES to its completion or modification. LU 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS For guidance in modifying this ~ Q document to include supplementary 0 2 OWNER conditions,see AIA Document LU A503TIM,Guide for Supplementary cn 3 CONTRACTOR Conditions. U) 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo, 'A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order t No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents°Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (369ADA42) 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES INDEX Architect's Approvals (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) 2.5,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Copyright 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 1.1.7, 1.5 Acceptance of Work Architect's Decisions 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.2.14,6.3, Access to Work 7.3.4,7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4,9.9.1, 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 13.4.2, 15.2 Accident Prevention Architect's Inspections 10 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Acts and Omissions Architect's Instructions 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,8.3.1,9.5.1, 10.2.5, 3.2.4,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 13.4.2 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Architect's Interpretations Addenda 4.2.11,4.2.12 1.1.1 Architect's Project Representative Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.10 3.7.4,3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Inspections and Testing 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2, 9.4.2,9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 3.5,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.9.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16, Additional Time,Claims for 3.18,4.1.2,4.2,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, 3.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,8.3.2, 15.1.6 9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 co Administration of the Contract Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors N 3.1.3,4.2,9.4,9.5 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3 N Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Architect's Representations c� 1.1.1 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Aesthetic Effect Architect's Site Visits w 4.2.13 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Allowances Asbestos 0 LU 3.8 10.3.1 Z) Applications for Payment Attorneys'Fees U) 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.5.4,9.6.3,9.7,9.10 3.18.1,9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3 Approvals Award of Separate Contracts 2.1.1,2.3.1,2.5,3.1.3,3.10.2,3.12.8,3.12.9, 6.1.1,6.1.2 3.12.10.1,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Arbitration Portions of the Work 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 5.2 ARCHITECT Basic Definitions 4 1.1 Architect,Definition of Bidding Requirements 4.1.1 1.1.1 Architect,Extent of Authority Binding Dispute Resolution 2.5,3.12.7,4.1.2,4.2,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.4,7.4,9.2, 8.3.1,9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Bonds,Lien Architect,Limitations of Authority and 7.3.4.4,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.3 Responsibility Bonds,Performance,and Payment 2.1.1,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2, 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,5.2.1,7.4, Building Information Models Use and Reliance 9.4.2,9.5.4,9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 1.8 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Building Permit 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 3.7.1 Architect's Administration of the Contract Capitalization 3.1.3,3.7.4, 15.2,9.4.1,9.5 1.3 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 2 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Certificate of Substantial Completion 2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, Certificates for Payment 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7, Concealed or Unknown Conditions 9.10.1,9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 3.7.4,4.2.8,8.3.1, 10.3 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Conditions of the Contract 13.4.4 1.1.1,6.1.1,6.1.4 Certificates of Insurance Consent,Written 9.10.2 3.4.2,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 13.2, Change Orders 15.4.4.2 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.8.2.3,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,5.2.3, Consolidation or Joinder 7.1.2,7.1.3,7.2,7.3.2,7.3.7,7.3.9,7.3.10,8.3.1, 15.4.4 9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY Change Orders,Definition of SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7.2.1 1.1.4,6 CHANGES IN THE WORK Construction Change Directive,Definition of 2.2.2,3.11,4.2.8,7,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 7.3.1 11.5 Construction Change Directives Claims,Definition of 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2,7.1.3, 15.1.1 7.3,9.3.1.1 Claims,Notice of Construction Schedules,Contractor's 1.6.2, 15.1.3 3.10,3.11,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 3.2.4,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.9,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance co 15.4.1 15.1.4 N Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of N 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4, 7.3.9,9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 1.1.2 c� Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4,6.1.1,8.3.2,9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 OF THE LU Concealed or Unknown Conditions,Claims for 5.4.1.1,5.4.2, 11.5, 14 0 3.7.4 Contract Administration Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 Z) 3.2.4,3.18,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating U) 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 to Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1 15.4.1 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of Cleaning Up 1.5.2,2.3.6,5.3 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Definition of Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.1.1 2.2.1,3.2.2,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,5.2.1,5.2.3, Contract Sum 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 2.2.2,2.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.8,3.10.2,5.2.3,7.3,7.4, Commencement of the Work,Definition of 9.1,9.2,9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 8.1.2 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Communications Contract Sum,Definition of 3.9.1,4.2.4 9.1 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time 3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 1.1.4,2.2.1,2.2.2,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,5.2.3,6.1.5, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 7.2.1.3,7.3.1,7.3.5,7.3.6,7,7,7.3.10,7.4,8.1.1, COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 8.2.1,8.2.3,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 9 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 Completion,Substantial Contract Time,Definition of 3.10.1,4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 8.1.1 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 CONTRACTOR Compliance with Laws 3 Contractor,Definition of 3.1,6.1.2 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 3 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.2.3,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contractors Contractor's Employees 3.14.2,6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 2.2.4,3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, Damage to the Work 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Liability Insurance Damages,Claims for 11.1 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 and Owner's Forces Damages for Delay 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.3, 12.2.4 6.2.3,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 1.2.2,2.2.4,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,4.2.4,5,9.6.2, 8.1.2 9.6.7,9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8.1.3 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2, Day,Definition of 3.5.1,3.7.4,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.2,5.2, 8.1.4 6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, Decisions of the Architect 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,6.3,7.3.4, Contractor's Representations 7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.4.2, 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.5,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions to Withhold Certification Work 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 3.3.2,3.18,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,9.5.1, 10.2.8 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Rejection and Correction of 3.2 2.5,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.3,9.5.1,9.5.3,9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3, co Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.10.4, 12.2.1 N 2.2.2,9.7 Definitions N Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,5.1, c� 14.1 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.1,9.1,9.8.1, 15.1.1 Contractor's Submittals Delays and Extensions of Time LIJ 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, 3.2,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Q 9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 0 Contractor's Superintendent Digital Data Use and Transmission Z) 3.9, 10.2.6 1.7 07 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Disputes Procedures 6.3,7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, Documents and Samples at the Site 7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 3.11 Coordination and Correlation Drawings,Definition of 1.2,3.2.1,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 1.1.5 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of 1.5,2.3.6,3.11 3.11 Copyrights Effective Date of Insurance 1.5,3.17 8.2.2 Correction of Work Emergencies 2.5,3.7.3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Employees,Contractor's Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 1.2 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Cost,Definition of Equipment,Labor,or Materials 7.3.4 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Costs 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 2.5,3.2.4,3.7.3,3.8.2,3.15.2,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 7.3.3.3,7.3.4,7.3.8,7.3.9,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, Execution and Progress of the Work 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.3.4,2.3.6,3.1,3.3.1,3.4.1,3.7.1, Cutting and Patching 3.10.1,3.12,3.14,4.2,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,9.5.1, 3.14,6.2.5 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 4 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Extensions of Time 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3, 7.2.1,7.3, 7.41 9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, Insurance,Stored Materials 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 9.3.2 Failure of Payment INSURANCE AND BONDS 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 11 Faulty Work Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 9.9.1 Final Completion and Final Payment Insured loss,Adjustment and Settlement of 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.5 Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interest 1 13.5 Governing Law Interpretation 13.1 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,5.11 6.1.2. 15.1.1 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretations,Written Hazardous Materials and Substances 4.2.11,4.2.12 10.2.4, 10.3 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 15.4.2 5.2.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Indemnification 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 3.17,3.18,9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, Information and Services Required of the Owner 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10.1,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, Labor Disputes 9.6.1,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 8.3.1 co 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Laws and Regulations N Initial Decision 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, N 15.2 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, c� Initial Decision Maker,Definition of 15.4 1.1.8 Liens LIJ Initial Decision Maker,Decisions 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Limitations,Statutes of 0 LLI Initial Decision Maker,Extent of Authority 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Z) 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Limitations of Liability U) Injury or Damage to Person or Property 3.2.2,3.5,3.12.10,3.12.10.1,3.17,3.18.1,4.2.6, 10.2.8, 10.4 4.2.7,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7,9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, Inspections 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, Limitations of Time 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.7, Instructions to Bidders 5.2,5.3,5.4.1,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, 1.1.1 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, Instructions to the Contractor 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.8.1,5.2.1,7,8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Materials,Hazardous Instruments of Service,Definition of 10.2.4, 10.3 1.1.7 Materials, Labor, Equipment and Insurance 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4.1,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 6.1.1,7.3.4,8.2.2,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.2.5, 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 11 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Notice of Cancellation or Expiration Means,Methods,Techniques, Sequences and 11.1.4,11.2.3 Procedures of Construction Insurance,Contractor's Liability 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 11.1 Mechanic's Lien Insurance,Effective Date of 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Mediation Insurance,Owner's Liability 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 11.2 15.4.1.1 Insurance,Property Minor Changes in the Work Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 5 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8, 7.1,7.4 Owner's Right to Clean Up MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 6.3 13 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Modifications,Definition of Separate Contracts 1.1.1 6.1 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Stop the Work 1.1.1, 1.1.2,2.5,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3, 7,8.3.1,9.7, 2.4 10.3.2 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work Mutual Responsibility 14.3 6.2 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of 14.2, 14.4 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications and Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Other Instruments of Service 2.4,2.5,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5,2.3.6,3.2.2,3.11,3.17,4.2.12, 12.2 5.3 Notice Partial Occupancy or Use 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2,2.1.2,2.2.2.,2.2.3,2.2.4,2.5,3.2.4, 9.6.6,9.9 3.3.1,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2.1,7.4, Patching,Cutting and 8.2.2 9.6.8,9.7,9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 3.14,6.2.5 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, Patents 15.1.6, 15.4.1 3.17 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance Payment,Applications for 11.1.4, 11.2.3 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, Notice of Claims 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.6.2,2.1.2,3.7.4,9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, Payment,Certificates for co 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7,9.10.1, N Notice of Testing and Inspections 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 N 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Payment,Failure of c� Observations,Contractor's 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 3.2,3.7.4 Payment,Final LIJ Occupancy 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 0 2.3.1,9.6.6,9.8 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and w Orders,Written 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 Z) 1.1.1,2.4,3.9.2,7,8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, Payments,Progress U) 14.3.1 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 OWNER PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2 9 Owner,Definition of Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.1 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 Owner,Evidence of Financial Arrangements PCB 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 10.3.1 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Performance Bond and Payment Bond 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 2.3.1,3.7,3.13,7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 Owner's Authority PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF 1.5,2.1.1,2.3.32.4,2.5,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, 10 4.1.2,4.2.4,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1,6.1,6.3,7.2.1, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,9.6.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.1 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, Product Data,Definition of 15.2.7 3.12.2 Owner's Insurance Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings 11.2 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors Progress and Completion 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 4.2.2,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work Progress Payments 2.5, 14.2.2 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 6 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Project,Definition of Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,6,8.3.1, 12.1.2 Project Representatives Separate Contractors,Definition of 4.2.10 6.1.1 Property Insurance Shop Drawings,Definition of 10.2.5, 11.2 3.12.1 Proposal Requirements Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 1.1.1 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Site,Use of 10 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Regulations and Laws Site Inspections 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4,9.9.1, 3.2.2,3.3.3,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.9.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.4 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, Site Visits,Architect's 15.4 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Rejection of Work Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Releases and Waivers of Liens Specifications,Definition of 9.3.1,9.10.2 1.1.6 Representations Specifications 3.2.1,3.5,3.12.6,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5,3.12.10,3.17,4.2.14 Representatives Statute of Limitations 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.10, 13.2.1 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stopping the Work 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.2,4.2.3,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 2.2.2,2.4,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials co 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 N Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions Subcontractor,Definition of N by Contractor 5.1.1 c� 3.2,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 5 LIJ Architect Subcontractors,Work by 0 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,3.18,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4, w Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 9.3.1.2,9.6.7 Z) Samples by Contractor Subcontractual Relations U) 3.12 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Rights and Remedies Submittals 1.1.2,2.4,2.5,3.5,3.7.4,3.15.2,4.2.6,5.3,5.4,6.1, 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.4,9.2,9.3, 6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Submittal Schedule Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.10.2,3.12.5,4.2.7 3.17 Subrogation,Waivers of Rules and Notices for Arbitration 6.1.1, 11.3 15.4.1 Substances,Hazardous Safety of Persons and Property 10.3 10.2, 10.4 Substantial Completion Safety Precautions and Programs 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 12.2, 15.1.2 Samples,Definition of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.12.3 9.8.1 Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Substitution of Subcontractors 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 5.2.3,5.2.4 Samples at the Site,Documents and Substitution of Architect 3.11 2.3.3 Schedule of Values Substitutions of Materials 9.2,9.3.1 3.4.2,3.5,7.3.8 Schedules,Construction Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 5.1.2 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 7 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Subsurface Conditions Time Limits 3.7.4 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, Successors and Assigns 5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, 13.2 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, Superintendent 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 3.9, 10.2.6 Time Limits on Claims Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, Title to Work 7.1.3,7.3.4,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 9.3.2,9.3.3 Suppliers UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 1.5,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.5.4,9.6, 12 9.10.5, 14.2.1 Uncovering of Work Surety 12.1 5.4.1.2,9.6.8,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown 15.2.7 3.7.4,8.3.1, 10.3 Surety,Consent of Unit Prices 9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3 7.3.3.2,9.1.2 Surveys Use of Documents 1.1.7,2.3.4 1.1.1, 1.5,2.3.6,3.12.6, 5.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Use of Site 14.3 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Suspension of the Work Values, Schedule of 3.7.5,5.4.2, 14.3 9.2,9.3.1 Suspension or Termination of the Contract Waiver of Claims by the Architect 5.4.1.1, 14 13.3.2 N Taxes Waiver of Claims by the Contractor N 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.4.4 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 N Termination by the Contractor Waiver of Claims by the Owner c� 14.1, 15.1.7 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause Waiver of Consequential Damages LIJ 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Liens 0 LIJ 14.4 9.3,9.10.2,9.10.4 Z) Termination of the Architect Waivers of Subrogation U) 2.3.3 6.1.1, 11.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment Warranty 14.2.2 3.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Weather Delays CONTRACT 8.3, 15.1.6.2 14 Work,Definition of Tests and Inspections 1.1.3 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, Written Consent 9.9.2,9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 1.5.2,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.10.3, TIME 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 8 Written Interpretations Time,Delays and Extensions of 4.2.11,4.2.12 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3, 7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Written Orders 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 1.1.1,2.4,3.9,7,8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 8 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist of the Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings, Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement,and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive,or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,the Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. §1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.1.3 The Work co The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or N partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment,and services provided or to be provided by N the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. c� §1.1.4 The Project w The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. 0 LU Z) §1.1.5 The Drawings � The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules,and diagrams. §1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements.Instruments of Service may include,without limitation,studies, surveys,models,sketches,drawings,specifications,and other similar materials. §1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2.The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 9 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. §1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions.If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law,or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable,then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable.In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed,to the fullest extent permitted by law,to give effect to the parties'intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. §1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles,or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. §1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. co N §1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications,and Other Instruments of Service N §1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective N Instruments of Service,including the Drawings and Specifications,and retain all common law,statutory,and other c� reserved rights in their Instruments of Service,including copyrights.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub- subcontractors,and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or LU distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'reserved rights. 0 LU Z) §1.5.2 The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the U) Instruments of Service provided to them,subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8,solely and exclusively for execution of the Work.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any,shown on the Instruments of Service.The Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect,and the Architect's consultants. §1.6 Notice §1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2,where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party,such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person,by mail,by courier,or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. §1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail,or by courier providing proof of delivery. §1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form.The parties will use AIA Document E203Tm--2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,to establish the protocols for the development,use,transmission, and exchange of digital data. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 10 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of,or reliance on,all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of,and reliance on,the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203Tm-2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,and the requisite AIA Document G202Tm-2013,Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form,shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk and without liability to the other parry and its contractors or consultants,the authors of,or contributors to,the building information model,and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 General §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall fin-nish to the Contractor,within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of,or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements §2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner co provides such evidence.If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1,the Contract Time shall N be extended appropriately. N N §2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's LU obligations under the Contract only if(1)the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require;(2)the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to 0 LU make payment when due;or(3)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum.If the Owner fails to Z) provide such evidence,as required,within fourteen days of the Contractor's request,the Contractor may U) immediately stop the Work and,in that event,shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped.However,if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under(3)above,the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided.If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. §2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2,the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. §2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as"confidential,"the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person.However,the Contractor may disclose"confidential"information,after seven(7)days'notice to the Owner,where disclosure is required by law,including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity,or by court or arbitrator(s)order.The Contractor may also disclose"confidential"information to its employees,consultants,sureties, Subcontractors and their employees,Sub-subcontractors,and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. §2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner §2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 11 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documentse Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. §2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture,or an entity lawfully practicing architecture,in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. §2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates,the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. §2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. §2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness.The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. §2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. §2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as N required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the N Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such N order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part c� of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. LU Q §2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails Z) within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default U) or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may,pursuant to Section 9.5.1,withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect,or failure.If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect,or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner,the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 General §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed,if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 12 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor §3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed,and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary,the Contractor shall,before starting each portion of the Work,carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work,and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. §3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15.If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations N of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner,subject to Section 15.1.7, N as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.If the Contractor performs those N obligations,the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, N inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents,for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents,or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws,statutes, LU ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. 0 §3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures Z) §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The U) Contractor shall be solely responsible for,and have control over,construction means,methods,techniques, sequences,and procedures,and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect,and shall propose alternative means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor's proposed alternative,the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 Labor and Materials §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 13 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4,the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. §3.5 Warranty §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise.The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work,materials,or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.if required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.5.2 All material,equipment,or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner,or shall be transferable to the Owner,and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. §3.6 Taxes `14 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are N legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled N to go into effect. 04 §3.7 Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building 0 permit as well as for other permits,fees,licenses,and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper w execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally Z) required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. U) §3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. §3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor,stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation,that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 14 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §3.7.5 If,in the course of the Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers,archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice,the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. §3.8 Allowances §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit,and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. co 0 N §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. N N §3.9 Superintendent §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance LU at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 0 LU Z) §3.9.2 The Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the U) name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.Within 14 days of receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor,stating whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or(2)requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. §3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project,including(1)the date of commencement of the Work,interim schedule milestone dates,and the date of Substantial Completion;(2)an apportionment of the Work by construction activity;and(3)the time required for completion of each portion of the Work.The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents.The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. §3.10.2 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule,shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval.The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall(1)be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule,the Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 15 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. §3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available,at the Project site,the Contract Documents,including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives,and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and the approved Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar required submittals.These shall be in electronic form or paper copy,available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. §3.12 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules,and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier,or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment,or workmanship,and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. co N §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose N is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed N in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. c� Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that LU are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 0 §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve,and submit to the Z) Architect,Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents,in U) accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. §3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals,the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(1)reviewed and approved them,(2)determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and(3)checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,by the Architect's approval thereof. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 16 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such notice,the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. §3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials,or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings,and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings,and other submittals related to the Work,designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services,certifications,and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. co N §3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been N performed in accordance with the design criteria,the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at N the time and in the form specified by the Architect. c� §3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, 0 rules and regulations,lawful orders of public authorities,and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably w encumber the site with materials or equipment. Z) 07 U) §3.14 Cutting and Patching §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting,or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.All areas requiring cutting,fitting,or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting,fitting,or patching,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting,patching,or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold,from the Owner or a Separate Contractor,its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 Cleaning Up §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery,and surplus materials from and about the Project. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 17 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design,process,or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications,or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However,if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by,or made known to,the Contractor,the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. §3.18 Indemnification §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages, losses,and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss,or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss,or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. co N §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, N a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the N indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, c� compensation,or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts,or other employee benefit acts. LU Q ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT §4.1 General Z) §4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and idcnti ficd as such in U) the Agreement. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities,and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified,or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor,and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.2 Administration of the Contract §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. §4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction,or as otherwise agreed with the Owner,to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.The Architect will not have control over,charge of,or responsibility for the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. §4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits,the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and promptly report to the Owner(1)known deviations from the Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 18 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Contract Documents,(2)known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and(3)defects and deficiencies observed in the Work.The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of,and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of,the Contractor,Subcontractors, or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities.The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner.The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. §4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. §4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3,whether or not the Work is fabricated,installed or completed. However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,Subcontractors, suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals co such as Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance N with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be N taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved c� submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the LU accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as 0 LU required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Z) Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5,and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval U) of safety precautions or of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion;issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10;and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of,and reasonably inferable from,the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 19 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either,and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If appropriate,the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 Definitions §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor. §5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the N Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the N Work,including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design.Within 14 days of N receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has c� reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. LU Q §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Z) Contractor has made reasonable objection. U) §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor,person,or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. §5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor,by these Contract Documents,assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies,and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 20 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub- subcontractors. §5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement,the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. §5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4,the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity.If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract. `o N O N ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS N §6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts §6.1.1 The term"Separate Contractor(s)"shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements.The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the LU Owner's own forces,and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract,including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and 0 LU waiver of subrogation. Z) U) U) §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules.The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,Separate Contractors,and the Owner until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or with Separate Contractors,the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including,without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6,and Articles 10, 11,and 12. §6.2 Mutual Responsibility §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 21 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor's Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or Separate Contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work.The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent. §6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor's delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor,Separate Contractors,and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK co §7.1 General N §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the N Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the c� limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. LU §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor,and Architect.A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the 0 UJ Contractor.An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. Z) U) U) §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive,or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.2 Change Orders §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor,and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 The extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. §7.3 Construction Change Directives §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions,or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 22 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. §7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement,or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement,a reasonable amount.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor,including applicable payroll taxes,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers' compensation insurance,and other employee costs approved by the Architect; .2 Costs of materials,supplies,and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use,or similar taxes,directly related to the change;and .5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time,the Contractor may make a Claim in N accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. N N §7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in c� the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or w Contract Time. Q O §7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, Z) including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall U) be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines,in the Architect's professional judgment,to be reasonably justified.The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. §7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order.Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. §7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time.The Architect's order for minor changes shall be in writing.If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 23 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documentse Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work.If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect's order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 Definitions §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 Progress and Completion §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion co within the Contract Time. 04 N §8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time N §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by(1)an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,of an employee of either,or of a Separate Contractor;(2)by changes ordered in the LU Work;(3)by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties,adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2,or other causes beyond the Contractor's control;(4)by delay 0 LU authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution;or(5)by other causes that the Z) Contractor asserts,and the Architect determines,justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended for such U) reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 Contract Sum §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. §9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price,the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment,allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form,and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy,required by the Architect.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require,and Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 24 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documentse Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's subsequent Applications for Payment. §9.3 Applications for Payment §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values,if required under Section 9.2,for completed portions of the Work.The application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment that the Owner or Architect require,such as copies of requisitions,and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers,and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable co insurance,storage,and transportation to the site,for such materials and equipment stored off the site. N §9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner N no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the LU Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information,and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, 0 security interests,or encumbrances,in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,suppliers,or other persons or entities w that provided labor,materials,and equipment relating to the Work. Z) 07 §9.4 Certificates for Payment §9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either(1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor;or(2)issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1;or(3)withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment,and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment,that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information,and belief,the Work has progressed to the point indicated,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion,and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work;(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures;(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment;or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 25 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims,unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part,that parry may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. §9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts N previously withheld. N N §9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3,the Owner may,at its sole option, c� issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by LU joint check,the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next 0 Application for Payment. w Z) §9.6 Progress Payments U) §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. §9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor,no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner,the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work.If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days,the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid.Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay,or to see to the payment of money to,a Subcontractor or supplier,except as may otherwise be required by law. §9.6.5 The Contractor's payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 26 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust,or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss,liability,damage or expense,including reasonable attorney's fees and litigation expenses,arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier.Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment,the Owner shall notify the Contractor.If approved by the applicable court,when required,the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. §9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents,the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start- co up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. N §9.8 Substantial Completion N §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the LU Work for its intended use. Q O §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept Z) separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of U) items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion;establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance;and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.Upon such acceptance,and consent of surety if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 27 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,retainage,if any,security, maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor,and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment §9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection.When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and co belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance N with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final N Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation c� that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. LU Q §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected Z) with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts U) withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect,(3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment,(5)documentation of any special warranties,such as manufacturers'warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties,and(6)if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens,claims, security interests,or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance.If a lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim,security interest,or encumbrance,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed,corrected,and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 28 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens,Claims,security interests,or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents;or .4 audits performed by the Owner,if permitted by the Contract Documents,after final payment. §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a supplier,shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prcvcnt damage,injury,or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site, under care,custody,or control of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a Sub-subcontractor;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements,roadways, structures,and utilities not designated for removal,relocation,or replacement in the course of construction. co N §10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with,and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, N rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities,bearing on safety of persons or property or their N protection from damage,injury,or loss. c� §10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement,erect,and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings 0 against hazards;promulgating safety regulations;and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of w the safeguards. Z) U) rn §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment,or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3.The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 29 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other parry,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,notice of the injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances.If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB),encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition. §10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to cause it to be rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order,the Contract Time shall be extended co appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs N of shutdown,delay,and start-up. N N §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against LU claims,damages,losses,and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or 0 LU death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss,or Z) expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property U) (other than the Work itself),except to the extent that such damage,loss,or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents.The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. §10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs(1)for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles,or(2)where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1,except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury,or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 30 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability,containing the endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Owner,Architect,and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. §11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types,for such penal sums,and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. §11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance.Within three(3)business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration.Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor,the Owner shall,unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner,have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor.The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. co 0 N §11.2 Owner's Insurance N §11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability,containing the c� endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance LU companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. 0 §11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance.If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required Z) property insurance,with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the U) Contract Documents,the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.Upon receipt of notice from the Owner,the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work.When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted.In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage,the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner.The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice,and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. §11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance.Within three(3)business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration.Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1)the Contractor,upon receipt of notice from the Owner,shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor;(2)the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted;and(3)the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled.If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage,the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order.The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 31 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §11.3 Waivers of Subrogation §11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub- subcontractors,agents,and employees,each of the other;(2)the Architect and Architect's consultants;and(3) Separate Contractors,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents,and employees,for damages caused by fire,or other causes of loss,to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect,Architect's consultants,Separate Contractors, subcontractors,and sub-subcontractors.The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation.This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity(1)even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,(2)even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,or(3)whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. §11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,to the extent permissible by such policies,the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. §11.4 Loss of Use,Business Interruption,and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property,or the inability to conduct normal operations,due to fire or other causes of loss.The co Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property,due to N fire or other hazards however caused. N N §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss §11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as LU fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2.The Owner shall pay the Architect and 0 LU Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner,and by appropriate agreements the Z) Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. U) §11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss,the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds.The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt,the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions.Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience,the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose.If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds,the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss,and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute,the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if requested in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 32 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,the costs of uncovering the Work,and the cost of correction,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2 Correction of Work §12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections,the cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2.2 After Substantial Completion §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so,unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first co performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual N completion of that portion of the Work. N N §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. LU Q §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. Z) 07 U) §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors,whether completed or partially completed,caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located,excluding that jurisdiction's choice of law rules.If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 33 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §13.2 Successors and Assigns §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns,and legal representatives to covenants,agreements,and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project,if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. §13.3 Rights and Remedies §13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights,and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect,or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. §13.4 Tests and Inspections §13.4.1 Tests,inspections,and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules,and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities.Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections,and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public co authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections,and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect N timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such N procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections,or approvals that do not become requirements until c� after bids are received or negotiations concluded.The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests,inspections,or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. LU Q §13.4.2 If the Architect,Owner,or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection,or approval not included under Section 13.4.1,the Architect will,upon written Z) authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection, 07 or approval,by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.4.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. § 13.4.3 If procedures for testing,inspection,or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure,including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.4.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection,or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections,or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. §13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 34 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 Termination by the Contractor §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work,for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency,that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions,delays,or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a co Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing N portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract N Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional c� days'notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. LU Q § 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor Z) .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; U) .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of a public authority;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist,and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,the Owner may,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days'notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon written request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 35 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. §14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work,in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay,or interruption under Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is,was,or would have been,so suspended,delayed,or interrupted,by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and N purchase orders. N §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work N properly executed;costs incurred by reason of the termination,including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts;and the termination fee,if any,set forth in the Agreement. w Q ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims Z) § 15.1.1 Definition U) A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,payment of money,a change in the Contract Time,or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. §15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract,whether in contract,tort,breach of warranty or otherwise,in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law,but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. §15.1.3 Notice of Claims §15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 36 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event,no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required. §15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance §15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim,except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision,subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15.The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. §15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. §15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have co been reasonably anticipated,and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. N §15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages N The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes LU .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, 0 business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of w such persons;and Z) .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of U) personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §15.2 Initial Decision §15.2.1 Claims,excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4,and 11.5,shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement.Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim.If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker,the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered.Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other parry,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise, or(5)advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that,in the Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 37 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. §15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,the Initial Decision Maker may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of the request,and shall either(1)provide a response on the requested supporting data,(2)advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished,or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. §15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall(1)be in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor;and(3)notify the parties and the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final.and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation,to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. §15.2.6.1 Either party may,within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision,demand in writing that the co other party file for mediation.If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for N mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding N dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. c� §15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 0 LU Z) §15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in U) accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract,except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9.10.5,and 15.1.7,shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. §15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement.A request for mediation shall be made in writing,delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but,in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2,the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s)and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. §15.3.3 Either party may,within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute,demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 38 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order N0.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) §15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4 Arbitration §15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement,any Claim subject to,but not resolved by,mediation shall be subject to arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement.The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration.The parry filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation,but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. §15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement,shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court co having jurisdiction thereof. N §15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder N §15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party LU provided that(1)the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation,(2)the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,and(3)the arbitrations employ materially 0 LU similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). Z) 07 U) §15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. §15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4,whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. Init. AIA Document A201®—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.The"American Institute of Architects,""AIA,"the AIA Logo,"A201,"and"AIA Contract Documents"are 39 registered trademarks and may not be used without permission.This document was produced by AIA software at 12:20:36 CT on 02/28/2022 under Order No.9281462824 which expires on 07/12/2022,is not for resale,is licensed for one-time use only,and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents®Terms of Service.To report copyright violations,e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA42) co N This page int ntiona.11y left blank N N N r W Q O W SECTION 00 7300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions defined in Document 00 7200 - General Conditions and other provisions of Contract Documents as indicated below. Provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. B. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions that are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.03 MODIFICATIONS TO AIA A201 1.04 ARTICLE 1.1 - BASIC DEFINITIONS A. 1.1.9 Workmanship: 1. The degree of skill in which the Work is completed. 2. All Work is to be completed in a professional manner by a skilled and experienced craftsman in accordance with the manufacturer's installations instructions. 3. All pipes, conduits, ducts, and supports are to be installed parallel or perpendicular to the building lines while maintaining the integrity of the installation. 1.05 ARTICLE 1.2 -CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. 1.2.1.1 Add Subparagraph: 1. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided cry in accordance with the engineer/architect's interpretation without change in the contract o sum. 1.06 ARTICLE 3.6 -TAXES N A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 3.6.1: The Owner will obtain an exemption certificate for the Contractor for taxes and duties on certain Products or items, for purchasing Products or items for the Work. Q 0 2. 3.6.1: Purchasers for material supplies will be given a sales and use tax exempt number w to exempt the requirement of sales and use tax for materials supplied for this project, D therefore bidders should not include sales and use tax in their bid amounts, as law would U) allow. 3. Building Materials Sales Tax and Use Tax: a. Contractors are to follow Senate Bill 227; ACT 77.54 regarding sales and use tax for the purchase of building materials. b. Senate Bill 227; ACT 77.54 (9M)of the statutes; Relating to: a sales and use tax exemption for building materials that become a part of the facility for a local unit of government or nonprofit organization. c. The School District is an exempt entity for sales tax purposes pursuant to ACT 77.54(9a)(b), Wis. Stats. and materials purchased by contractor for incorporation into any School District facility (other than roads, highways or streets) under a contract with the School District are similarly exempt from the imposition of sales taxes pursuant to ACT 77.54(9m), Wis. Stats. Bids should NOT include sales tax on exempt materials or other tangible personal property which will become components of the facility. A copy of the School District Certificate of Tax Exempt Status (CES) will be provided to the successful bidder at the time of contracting for use in the documenting tax-exempt purchases. The Contractors shall include any other(non- exempted)taxes, if applicable with the bid. 1.07 ARTICLE 7.2 -CHANGE ORDERS A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 7.2.2: The following fees apply to Changes in the Work: a. A 10 percent maximum on overhead and profit for the direct cost of Work performed by a Contractor or Subcontractor; Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 7300 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation b. A 5 percent maximum overhead and profit on indirect costs of a Contractor's Subcontractors; c. The total mark-up shall not exceed 20 percent and all mark-ups are subject to the Architect approval. d. On Work deleted from the Contract, credit to the Owner shall be the Architect approved net cost plus 1/2 of the overhead and profit percentage noted above. 2. In the case of an increase or decrease in the contract sum, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data, showing adjustments on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. 1.08 ARTICLE 7.3 -CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 7.3.11: The following fees apply to Changes in the Work in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6: a. A 10 percent maximum on overhead and profit for the direct cost of Work performed by a Contractor or Subcontractor; b. A 5 percent maximum overhead and profit on indirect costs of a Contractor's Subcontractor; c. The total mark-up shall not exceed 20 percent and all mark-ups are subject to the Architect approval. d. On Work deleted from the Contract, credit to the Owner shall be the Architect approved net cost plus 1/2 of the overhead and profit percentage noted above. 2. In the case of an increase or decrease in the contract sum, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data, showing adjustments on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. c, N 1.09 ARTICLE 8 -TIME N A. Add the following subparagraph: 1. 8.2.4: Contract Time is identified in Section 00 3113 - Bidding and Construction Schedule. N 1.10 ARTICLE 11.1 -CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE w A. Add the following Paragraph as follows: Q B. Insurance: w C. The Contractor shall secure and maintain such insurance from an insurance company U) authorized to write casualty insurance in the State where the work is located as will protect — himself, his subcontractors and which shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Architect and their officers, agents, and employees from and against all claims for bodily injury, death or property damage which may arise from the Contractor's operations under this contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor and Subcontractor. D. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under this section and shall have filed the certificate of insurance with the Owner and a copy with the Owner's attorney. Each insurance policy shall contain a clause assuring the insurance company will not cancel the insurance without thirty days written notice to the Owner, the Owner's attorney, and the Architect of intention to cancel. The amounts of such insurance shall be not less than the following, or greater if required by law: 1. Commercial General Liability (Including Premises-Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage): a. Bodily Injury and Property Damage (Name Owner as additional insured): 1) $1,000,000 Each Occurrence 2) $50,000 Damage to Rented Premises (Each Occurrence) 3) $5,000 Med Exp (Any One Person) 4) $1,000,000 Personal &Advertising Injury 5) $2,000,000 General Aggregate 6) $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate b. Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for two years after final payment. Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 7300 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation c. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C, or U coverage as applicable. d. Contractual Liability to be included. 2. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: a. Bodily Injury: 1) $1,000,000 CSL Each Person 2) $(included) Each Occurrence b. Property Damage: 1) $(included) Each Occurrence 3. Umbrella Excess Liability: Name Owner as additional insured: a. Excess Liability: 1) $3,000,000 Each Occurrence 2) $3,000,000 Aggregate 4. Worker's Compensation: a. State Statutory b. Applicable Federal Statutory 1) (e.g. Longshoremen's) c. Employer's Liability 1) $1,000,000 Each Accident 2) $1,000,000 Disease - EA Employee 3) $1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit 5. Rented Equipment: a. Special/Replacement Cost 1) $100,000 Rented Equipment 6. Per occurrence-30 day notice of cancellation/non-renewal - no waiver of subrogation. 1.11 ARTICLE 11.1.2 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND M A. Add the following paragraphs: o 1. 11.1.2.1: The bond value requirements are as follows: a. Provide bonds on a standard surety bond form. N b. Provide a 100 percent Performance Bond. `V c. Provide a 100 percent Payment Bond. w d. Deliver bonds within 3 days after execution of the Contract. Q 1.12 ARTICLE 11.2 - PROPERTY INSURANCE 0 Lu A. The Owner will be responsible for purchasing and maintaining a "special form" or equivalent D policy as described in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. U) 1. The General Conditions refers to the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. A copy of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction can be obtained at the office of the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 7300 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 00 7380 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 1.01 A. In the event that Substantial Completion of the Work has not occurred on or before Friday, August 30, 2024, then commencing on Tuesday, September 03, 2024, and continuing for each day or fraction thereof until Substantial Completion of the Work is established, the Contractor shall pay to the Owner, at the sole option of the Owner, the amount of One Thousand and No/100 Dollars ($1000.00) per diem ("Damage Amount"). B. The Contractor and the Owner agree that in the event the Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior to Friday, August 30, 2024, the Owner will suffer damages in an amount which may, due to the special nature of the Project, the Owner's business and the Owner's reliance upon the Substantial Completion date, be impractical or extremely difficult to ascertain. The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Damage Amount is a reasonable estimate of the damages that the Owner will suffer in the event that Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur on or prior to the Substantial Completion Date. C. Payment of liquidated damages shall be in the form of a Change Order reducing the Contractor's Contract Sum by the amount of the liquidated damages. If the Contractor refuses to sign the Change Order for liquidated damages, the Owner reserves the right to unilaterally reduce the Contract Sum by the amount of the liquidated damages. If the amount of the liquidated damages exceeds the remaining unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the amount of the unpaid balance and the Contractor shall pay the Owner the difference between the liquidated damages and the unpaid balance. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 00 7380 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions and Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Use Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703, edition stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit draft to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification section. Identify site mobilization. co F. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead N and profit. N G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. c14 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Lu A. Payment Period: Monthly. Q B. Progress Payments: For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the o Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise D due: Five Percent(5%). U) C. Use Form AIA G702 and Form AIA G703, edition stipulated in the Agreement. D. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. E. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. F. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following: 1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. 3. Scheduled Values. 4. Previous Applications. 5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. 6. Authorized Change Orders. 7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8. Percentage of Completion. 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage. G. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. H. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. I. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 2000 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation J. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment when submitting paper copies. K. Include the following with the application: 1. Transmittal letter as specified for submittals in Section 01 3000. 2. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000. 3. Project record documents as specified in Section 01 7800, for review by Owner which will be returned to the Contractor. L. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to Contract Documents. B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. C. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. D. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be c, considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within seven o days. E. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing N the proposed change and its full effect on the work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and w a statement describing the effect on work by separate or other contractors. Document any Q requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. o Lu F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of D the Contract. U) 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, where applicable, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide the following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 2000 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. I. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. J. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub- schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. K. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 2000 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 2100 ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contingency allowance. B. As-Built Allowance. 1.02 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance. B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.03 AS-BUILT ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance. B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.04 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE A. Contingency Allowance: Include the stipulated sum/price of$30,000.00 for use upon Owner's co instructions. C) N B. CAD/As-built Allowance: Include the stipulated sum/price of$3,000.00 for use upon Owner's instructions. N PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED w PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED Q 0 END OF SECTION w D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 2100 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Coordination drawings. E. Submittals in general. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATOR A. Project Coordinator: General Contractor. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for employee access, traffic, and parking facilities. co C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. N D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, N reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. w E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. o F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. D U) G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator: U) 1. Requests for Interpretation. 2. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 3. Test and inspection reports. 4. Design data. 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. 7. Progress schedules. 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 10. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Project Coordinator will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. C. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 3000 - Page 1 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Note: The following agenda items are not intended to be the final or a complete list of the items that will be discussed. A complete agenda will be distributed at the preconstruction meeting. E. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Owner. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Shop drawings submittal, review times, and overall process. 9. Open for comments; attendees are encouraged to bring other topics or concerns up for discussion at this time. F. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, other participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. co 2. Owner. "' 0 3. Architect. N 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. o 2. Review of work progress. w 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. D 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. U) 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of work, with a general outline for remainder of work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 5 days. C. Within 7 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 5 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 3000 - Page 2 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Definitions: 1. BIMNDC Coordination Model and Drawings: A CAD 3d model and output in PDF format of building infrastructure system drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy the same space. 2. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, hydronic piping, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines. 3. Fire Sprinkler trades shall include, but not limited to, service entry, mains, branches and sprinkler heads. 4. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers, raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact coordination with other disciplines. 5. Structural trades will shall include, but not limited to, major structural elements such as walls, beams, columns, trusses and all other elements that would be used to coordinate building infrastructure systems. 6. General Building trades shall include, but not limited to, walls, doors, windows, spaces and all other elements that would be used to coordinate building infrastructure systems. 7. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included. 8. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in chase, and vertical trade items. B. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, to provide adequate access for service and maintenance and identify installation of equipment that may need to be installed before other general construction items co be completed. N C. Participation: 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for N purposes of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this process. w The Mechanical Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements of this project o and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators, competent to prepare the required w coordination drawings. D 2. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements of this U) project and skilled technicians/CAD operators, competent to prepare the required coordination drawings. 3. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall participate in the coordination drawing process. 4. The coordination drawings shall be produced in three dimensional CAD, Revit or other 3D modeling software that allows for exporting, save as, or native import into Autodesk Navisworks for 3D model management. 5. A coordinated computer model in a Navisworks (NWD)file on a periodic basis and will be used for contractors to reference and make corrections to each respective trade model until all conflicts are resolved. 6. Model Coordination Meetings shall be held at regular intervals to execute the process. The Coordinating Contractor will lead model management efforts and will require the Contractors with model assignments to attend meetings to assign special parameters of each trade prior to final approval of coordination drawings. The initial model coordination meeting will be to develop the file naming, origin coordination, and software file testing prior to 3D model and drawing conception. The coordination schedule and clash resolution priorities will also be reviewed and established. Contractors should allow for a model coordination meeting once a week until the process is complete. The coordination meetings shall be attended by each Contractor that is required to participate in the process and to address issues and concerns. Each representative must have decision making authority and first-hand knowledge of what has been modeled and be prepared to resolve conflicts based on what is discussed in the coordination meeting. ISG will not be attending coordination meetings. As issues arise the Pre Construction RFI process will be Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 3000 - Page 3 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation used. 7. Electronic 3D BIM drawings shall be submitted to the Mechanical Contractor for addition of work by other trades. ISG will provide electronic copies of Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical drawings and 3d Scan data for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer"waiver provided by ISG. ISG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for coordination drawings. D. Drawing Requirements: 1. The Bid Design documents will be the baseline starting point. 2. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner. Drawing Scale will be appropriate to the information being conveyed. 3. Ductwork and gravity draining piping drawings shall be the baseline system for other components. Ductwork and gravity draining piping drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as the coordination process progresses. 4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination meeting. Additional drawings may be required if other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process. E. General: 1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to ISG and Owner's Representative. ISG will only review identified conflicts as they arise and give an opinion but will not perform as a coordinator. 2. ISG reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment provided by the trades. 3. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in his/her bid co sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of utilities made o necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and functional system. N 4. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to participation N in the coordination process. 5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for additional ' fittings, re-routings or changes of duct size, that are essentially equivalent sizes to those Q shown on the drawings and determined necessary through the coordination process. o 6. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation and w coordination shall be brought to the attention of the ISG. D 7. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings by all L contractors prior to installing any of the components. 8. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination. 9. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as record drawings. 10. Drawings can be approved in stages as appropriate to the schedule. IE: Underground can be completed and approved so underground work may begin as above ground coordination continues. 3.05 SUBMITTALS IN GENERAL A. All submittals shall be submitted to the Architect through the Project Coordinator- No exceptions. B. PDFs by e-mail is the preferred method; coordinate with Architect's representative. 1. Refer to "Requirements for Electronically Submitted Shop Drawings" attached to this section. C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 3000 - Page 4 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. F. By submitting submittals, the General Contractor represents to Architect that General Contractor has: 1. Reviewed and approved them. 2. Determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so. 3. Checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work of the Contract Documents. G. Submittals that do not appear to be reviewed and approved will be returned to the General Contractor without the Architect's review. Time delays for this breach in procedure will be at the sole expense of the General Contractor. H. All shop drawings shall be submitted no later than 45 days after execution of the contract. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. co D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES N article below. N 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: w 1. Design data. Q 2. Certificates. 0 3. Test reports. D 4. Inspection reports. U) 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. E. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals. 3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the Contract Documents and coordinating related work. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 3000 - Page 5 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form. 1. For shop drawing submittals use form attached to this specification section. C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 10 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 3000 - Page 6 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 01 3000 --ATTACHMENT SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL FORM Architects Project No: 23-29513 Date: Project Name: Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation Specification Section Number: Shop Drawing # Specification Section Name: Description: Subcontractor or Supplier Approval: General Contractor or Construction Manager Approval: co N O N N N r W Q O W Z) U) U) Architect/Engineer Review: Other Reviews and Comments: This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 3000 --ATTACHMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONICALLY SUBMITTED SHOP DRAWINGS 1. The Contractor shall fill out and include the submittal cover sheet included in the project manual. 2. The shop drawings are to be reviewed by the Contractor before submitting. All field required verifications and missing information shall be completed and noted on the drawings. The Contractor shall review them and verify that the products submitted are acceptable per the specifications. The Contractor shall then affix their stamp on the submittal cover sheet. Contractor must review- No pass-through drawings are permitted. 3. The Contractor shall prepare a single PDF file so that all sheets of the submittal are included in one document. Only ONE specifications section per submittal is permitted. Each PDF shall contain Bookmarks set to the destination of separate items contained within the file. If the Contractor elects to use their own transmittal sheet it shall be a separate attachment. 4. Scans shall be in color. All pages shall be oriented correctly. Actual sheet sizes for the submittal shall be 8 '/2 x11 or 11x17 whenever possible. All print and details must be legible at those sizes. Larger file sheets such as 24x36 sheet size shall be identified in the e-mail. 5. The e-mail subject line shall list the five-digit project number first followed by the project name. Then the section number and a brief description of the submittal contents shall follow the submittal number. Example: 12345-High School Addition - 23 3700-Air outlets and inlets. 6. The PDF file or attachment shall be named as follows. Example: 12345- 23 3700-Air outlets and inlets.pdf 7. Samples and color selections associated with the drawings shall be included in a separate attachment when practical. Actual samples, color selections shall be delivered to ISG and the shop co N drawings will not be reviewed until actual samples are received. N 8. The Architect/ Engineer will review the drawings, make notes as required on the drawings and stamp them. The PDF file shall then be renamed by adding the action required such as C14 REVIEWED, FURNISH AS CORRECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT or REJECTED. Example: 23 w 3700-Air outlets and inlets- 12345 High School Addition-REVIEWED.pdf Q 9. The Architect/ Engineer shall then use the original email and attach the reviewed drawings and o forward back to the contractor. The e-mail that they are attached to will be considered the D transmittal. Any notes in the body of the email from the Architect/ Engineer shall be considered as U) written on the sheets of the PDF file. 10. No hard copies will be sent by the Architect/ Engineer. Note: Hard copies will be required to be included in the O&M Manuals as part of the project close out submittals. END OF ATTACHMENT This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W co U) SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. References and standards. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Manufacturers'field services. F. Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities. B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. General: As indicated in individual specification sections. C. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the co contract documents, or for Owner's information. N D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and N to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. � b. Project title and number. p c. Name of inspector. Lu d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. U) e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Compliance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 4000 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. H. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Comply with reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor co N those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference o N otherwise in any reference document. N PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED N PART 3 EXECUTION w 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION ~ Q A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and Lu workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. D B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 4000 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. C. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 4000 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary sanitary facilities. C. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. D. Waste removal facilities and services. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Owner will provide the following: 1. Electrical power, consisting of connection to existing facilities. a. Contractor shall provide portable generator power as required when connection to existing facilities is not adequate to complete the Work. 2. Water supply, consisting of connection to existing facilities. B. Provide and pay for all additional lighting, heating and cooling, and ventilation required to complete the Work. C. Provide and pay for all temporary heating shelters required to complete the work. The Owner will not consider any requests for extra charges related to weather. D. Provide and maintain a minimum light level of 5 foot-candles for a safe work environment throughout the project. E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. 1. Replace all damage and worn receptacles used during construction prior to substantial co completion. o CIA F. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water. N 1.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES c14 A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. w B. Use of existing sanitary facilities is permitted, pending approval from Owner. Q C. Maintain dailyin clean and sanitary condition. ui y w D. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found. U) 1.04 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1. The term "non-owned" refers to insurance coverage for other vehicles not owned by the named insured's. 1.05 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence, minimum; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks where applicable. 1. Install fence around entire construction site. C. Installation: Install safety fencing according to manufacturer's instructions, and according to local governing authorities. 1.06 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner-occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 5000 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. a. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. b. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. c. Establish condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to start of alterations. d. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.07 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Standard Covid related protocols. 1.08 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. 1.09 WASTE REMOVAL co A. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory N requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to N legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. c14 B. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. Q 0 C. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and w orderly condition. U) D. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. E. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.10 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. E. Restore existing site damaged by construction to original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 5000 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re-use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Base specified/scheduled products and design intent. F. Inconsistencies. G. Substitutions in general. H. Substitution limitations. I. Procedures for Owner-supplied products. J. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. co PART 2 PRODUCTS No N 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS N A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, Q reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the p Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. w D 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS U) L A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall assure the Owner that all new equipment and materials are asbestos free. The Contractor, subcontractors, and material suppliers are required to provide letters of non- asbestos confirmation with supporting documentation prior to material installations. The Owner may select materials to test for asbestos at any time including prior to and/or after installation. If suspect asbestos materials are tested and found to contain asbestos, the materials shall be abated in accordance with asbestos regulations by an Owner approved consultant and abatement contractor. New asbestos free products shall be re-installed by the Contractor supplying such material. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all new materials. If asbestos is found in the new materials, the cost for asbestos design, on-site monitoring, abatement, and replacement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Owner will collect and pay for the testing of any random suspect asbestos samples. C. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. D. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. E. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 6000 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. D. Products that do not meet project specifications may be rejected at any time during the project. E. Cost associated with replacement product and delay in project schedule due to rejection shall be at sole expense of Contractor. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BASE SPECIFIED/SCHEDULED PRODUCTS AND DESIGN INTENT A. Certain specification sections will indicate a base manufacturer and will then list other acceptable manufacturers. Similarly, certain specification sections will list multiple acceptable manufacturers but only one of the manufacturers will be scheduled on a plan sheet. In these scenarios, the designer has designed the system with considerations for the base manufacturer or the product scheduled on the plan sheet. It is the responsibility of all bidders, contractors, suppliers to ensure that when bidding using an acceptable manufacturer other than the base manufacturer or the scheduled manufacturer that the design intent is met. Providing a product by an acceptable manufacturer other than the base specified or scheduled manufacturer co constitutes a representation that the submitter: o 1. Has investigated supplied product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality" level of the base specified/scheduled product. N 2. Will provide the same warranty for the supplied product as for the base specified/scheduled product. 3. As a result of differences between the base specified/scheduled product and the other Q acceptable manufacturers will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work o that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. w 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become U) apparent. U) 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re- approval by authorities. 6. Will maintain dimensions, locations, clearances, accesses and other design intent shown on the plan or otherwise provided by the base specified/scheduled product. 3.02 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation without change in the contract sum. 3.03 SUBSTITUTIONS IN GENERAL A. Proposed substitutions are required to be equivalent in all aspects to the specified products including but not limited to appearance, quality, and performance. B. When specified in individual sections actual samples shall be provided a minimum of 12 days prior to the bid due date for Architect's review and approval before products other than those scheduled or specified with be accepted; No Exceptions. 3.04 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS A. Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 10 days before receipt of bids. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 6000 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. The substantiating data shall provide a side by side comparison consisting of sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. D. Provide complete information on required changes to other Work to accommodate each proposed substitution. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. When a request to substitute a product is made, Architect may approve the substitution and will issue an Addendum to known bidders. G. Substitution Submittal Procedure 1. Transmit each substitution request with the Substitution Request cover letter attached to this specification section. 2. PDFs by e-mail is the preferred method; coordinate with Architect's representative. Only submit paper copies where necessary as follows: a. Submit five copies of request for substitution for consideration. cry 3. The submitter shall prepare a single PDF file when submitting by email so that all sheets N of a submittal are included in one document. Only ONE major product per submittal is permitted. Each PDF shall contain Bookmarks set to the destination of separate items N contained within the file. If the submitter elects to use their own transmittal sheet it shall be a separate attachment. w a. Scans shall be in color, pages shall be oriented correctly, actual sheet sizes for the submittal shall be 11 by 17 inch or 8 1/2 by 11 inch whenever possible, and all o content must be legible. ui 4. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. cn 5. Multiple proposed substitutions submitted on one form will only be considered when products are directly related. Major products and components should be listed first. 6. Submit shop drawings, product data, certified test results, etc. attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 7. The Architect will reply with a decision to accept or reject request in a timely manner. H. Substitution Submittal Procedure (after contract award): 1. Requests for Substitutions received after Bid Opening will not be considered except in such cases where it is necessary to make a substitution due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, discontinuance of a product, and similar circumstances. Such Requests for Substitution of materials after Contract Award shall be made in writing to the Architect and shall be made within ten (10) days of the date that the Contractor ascertains they cannot obtain the material or equipment specified. 2. Requests for Substitution will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or Product Data submittals without a separate previously submitted Request for Substitution Form, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of the Contract Documents. 3. The Architect with approval by the Owner will be the judge of the acceptability of all Requests for Substitution received after Bid Opening. 3.05 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 6000 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties, inspections, and service. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.06 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, N disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. N H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. N N 3.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to w installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to 0 excessive materials handling and misapplication. w B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. U) C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. Ln D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. J. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. K. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. L. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 6000 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 01 6000 --ATTACHMENT SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS Architects Project No: 23-29513 Date: Project Name: Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation Specification Section Manufacturer Specified Proposed Manufacturer Indicate drawing sheet name in lieu of specification section where applicable. Vendor/Supplier Name: Address: Contact: E-Mail: Telephone: Fax: co N CD Reason for Substitution: N N r W H Q Does Specification Allow for Substitutions of Proposers Items? Yes: _ No: _ D Will the Substitution Provide Cost Savings to the Owner? Yes: _ No: Are Proposed Substitutions Equivalent/Superior to those Specified? Yes: _ No: Did you provided marked-up product information showing side by side comparisons for both the specified products and proposed products? Yes: _ No: I, , accept responsibility for coordination of proposed substitution and accept all additional costs resulting from the incorporation of proposed substitution into the Project. (Proposers Signature Required) For Architect's Use:.......................................Comments: Accepted: Not Accepted: No Action Required: Submission: Incomplete: Too Late: Reviewed By: Date: This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Access panels required by trade. C. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. D. Pre-installation meetings. E. Cutting and patching. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. I. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. J. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions. D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance N data, warranties and bonds. N E. Section 02 4100 - Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and/or parts thereof; site utility N demolition. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, "' disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. w F. Section 31 0505 - Selective Demolition For Site Work. Q G. Individual Product Specification Sections: 0 w 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. D 2. Limitations on cutting structural members. U) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Date and time work will be executed. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 1 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. Cl) PART 2 PRODUCTS No 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS N A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching c14 and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where Q necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. o C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution w described in Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. U) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 2 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.05 ACCESS PANELS REQUIRED BY TRADE A. Trade requiring access shall provide and install access panels where not show or specified. N 0 B. The finished appearance and function will be subject to approval by the Architect/Owner." C. Provide panels that accommodate adjacent finishes in finished spaces. N D. Access panels shall meet all code requirements for each location they are installed and shall be sized appropriately. w 3.06 ALTERATIONS Q 0 A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and ui existing record documents only. U) 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. — 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 . 2. Provide walk-off mats as required to separate demolition and construction from existing building. C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. 3. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 3 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation necessary for successful application of new finish. 5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment , including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. CO N G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. N H. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the N surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, N patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. Lu I. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces o to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent w D finishes. cn 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match. J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site. K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 4 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. 1. All other cutting and patching is to be performed by the responsible trade. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning o to eliminate dust. N D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and N dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK w A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. Q 0 B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. ui C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate U) work area to prevent damage. — D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 5 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The intent of final cleaning is to provide the Owner with a product that is free of all dust, dirt, and debris related to the Work, and in a like new condition. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Wipe clean wood and laminate surfaces including doors, countertops, cabinets, windows, sills and all other similar surfaces. F. Wipe clean all painted surfaces. co G. Clean all hard finish floors including tile and sealed concrete and all others according to 0 manufacturer's instructions. H. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the N surface and material being cleaned. I. Clean filters of operating equipment. J. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; o dispose of in legal manner. Lu 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES U) Ln A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 6 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.15 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W Z) U) U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7000 - Page 7 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit preliminary draft of proposed format and outline of contents in a PDF format before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return with comments. C. Final Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit final manual and electronic copies with claim for final Application for Payment. Architect will retain one electronic copy. The original manual and one electronic copy will be provided to the Owner. 1. At the option of the Owner provide only an electronic copy in PDF format. co N D. Warranties and Bonds: Include originals and electronic copy of each in operation and N maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. N E. Operation and Maintenance Data: N 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and o operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. w 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will D be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content U) of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. F. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7800 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. co D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions o for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. N 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES N A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. w 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. o B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents w and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and U) recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. Ln C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7800 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. I. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. J. Include test and balancing reports. K. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants,Contractor, and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. o G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and N major component parts of equipment. "' H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. w I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to 0 size of text pages. w J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: U) 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. a. Source data. b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals. c. Operation and maintenance data. d. Field quality control data. e. Original warranties and bonds. K. Electronic Copy: Provide two copies of all operation and maintenance data in a PDF format on a flash drive. Locate storage devices in the front of the operation and maintenance manual. Label device with project name and substantial completion date. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7800 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q 0 W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 01 7800 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Concrete curing. F. Concrete finishing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. B. Section Division 22 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Mechanical items for casting into concrete. C. Section Division 26- Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Electrical items for casting into concrete. Coordinate location with electrical contractor. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 207.1 R- Guide to Mass Concrete (Re-approved 2012). B. ACI CODE-318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary 2019 (Reapproved 2022). C. ACI PRC-211.1 - Selecting Proportions for Normal-Density and High Density-Concrete - Guide co 2022. N D. ACI PRC-302.1 - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 2015. N E. ACI PRC-302.2 - Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials- Guide 2022. Lu F. ACI PRC-304 - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 2000 (Reapproved 2009). o G. ACI PRC-305- Guide to Hot Weather Concreting 2020. D U) H. ACI PRC-306 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting 2016. U) I. ACI PRC-308- Guide to External Curing of Concrete 2016. J. ACI PRC-347- Guide to Formwork for Concrete 2014 (Reapproved 2021). K. ACI SPEC-301 - Specifications for Concrete Construction 2020. L. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 2022. M. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 2018. N. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 2023. O. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 2021. P. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 2023. Q. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or[50 mm] Cube Specimens)2021. R. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement 2022. S. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 2020. T. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method 2023. Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 1 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation U. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 2010a (Reapproved 2016). V. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 2019. W. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 2019, with Editorial Revision (2022). X. ASTM C595/C595M - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements 2021. Y. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete 2023, with Editorial Revision. Z. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing 2017. AA. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete 2021. BB. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures 2020. CC. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 2018. DD. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers 2020. EE. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2018a. FF. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs 2017 (Reapproved 2023). 1.04 SUBMITTALS N 0 A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with N specified requirements and installation instructions. C. Mix designs: Submit mix design for each mix showing compliance with specified requirements. Lu D. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified. p E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation D procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. U) Ln F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI SPEC-301 and ACI CODE-318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI PRC-305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI PRC-306 when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Contractor's choice of standard product type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 2 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gauge, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Do not use clay bricks or similar blocks/chunks of material as rebar chairs. Concrete dobies as rebar chairs are acceptable. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal, Type II - Moderate, Portland type; or ASTM C595/C595M, Type IL - Portland-Limestone Cement Type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source. 2. Provide aggregate free of shale at all slab locations exposed to freeze/thaw action. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI PRC-211.1. F. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixture: 1. Manufacturers by concrete supplier: a. Euclid Chemical: www.euclidchemical.com. b. Fritz-Pak: www.fritzpak.com. c. Grace Construction Products: www.gcpat.com. cry d. Mapei GRT: www.mapei.com. N e. Master Builders Solutions: www.master-builders-solutions.com. f. Sika Corporation U.S.: www.usa.sika.com N g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight w of cement. o C. Admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494/C494M. w D D. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. U) 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Stego Wrap 15 mil, Class A by Stego Industries, LLC: www.stegoindustries.com. b. Moistop Ultra 15 mil, Class A by Henry Company: www.henry.com. c. Viper VaporCheck II 15 mil by ISI Building Products: www.isibp.com. d. WR Meadows 15 mil Perminator HP: www.wrmeadows.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2. Vapor Barrier Accessories: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier. 3. Location: Use at and adjacent (96 inches)to locations with Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials; refer to ACI PRC-302.2. B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch. C. Epoxy Grout Systems: Where indicated provide Hilti Hit-Hy 200 Epoxy System; other indicated systems; or approved equivalent system. 1. Hilti: www.hilti.com. Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 3 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II. 1. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Expansion-Joint Filler: Polyethylene/polypropylene semi-rigid closed-cell backing complying with ASTM D 3575/ASTM D 8139/ASTM D 1751, 1/2 inch thick and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch with peel-off feature. Provide product by Master Builders Solutions, W.R. Meadows, Namaco, or equivalent. 1. Place peel-off feature at top of slab when sealants are specified. Remove peel-off portion of expansion-joint filler prior to application of sealants. 2. Place peel off feature at bottom of slab when no sealants are specified. C. Plate Dowel System: Steel plate dowel and plastic dowel sleeve; with integral fasteners for attachment to formwork. 2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B, White Pigmented. 1. Product: L&M CURE R2 by Laticrete or approved equivalent. a. Other Approved Products: 1) SpecRez White by SpecChem. 2. Application Locations: Exterior Concrete surfaces unless indicated otherwise. Finish surfaces to a light broom finish prior to applying curing compound. co B. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. o 1. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 3.8 ounces per square yard. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN N A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI PRC-211.1 recommendations. Lu B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI SPEC-301. p 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for w preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. U) C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI PRC-211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. D. Materials In General: Do not use materials or combinations thereof that will result in a reaction that is detrimental to the structural integrity or visual appearance of concrete. E. Normal Weight Concrete: Refer to structural notes on the drawings. 2.09 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 4 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactable granular fill before placing vapor retarder as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand unless indicated otherwise. 2. Install vapor barrier in lieu of retarder at indicated locations. Refer to accessory materials of this section. 3. Level and compact base material. 4. Extend vapor barrier to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at the top of the slab, otherwise (a) at a point acceptable to the Architect or(b)where obstructed by impediments (such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site condition requiring early termination of the vapor barrier). At the point of termination, seal vapor barrier to the foundation wall, grade beam or slab itself. 5. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 6. Apply seam tape to a clean and dry vapor barrier. 7. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Avoid the use of non-permanent stakes driven through vapor retarder. 9. If non-permanent stakes are driven through vapor retarder, repair as recommended by o vapor retarder manufacturer. N 10. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with vapor barrier material of similar(or N better) permeance, puncture and tensile. N 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS w A. Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, Q and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. D 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE Ln A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI PRC-304. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI PRC-302.1. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, and other similar items will not be disturbed during concrete placement. D. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings. 1. If no pattern is shown, contractor shall provide for 15 by 15 feet saw cut areas and shall contact Engineer for exact locations of joints. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 24 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4)the depth of the slab. 1. Do not exceed 2 inches deep when/if slab thicknesses are greater than 8 inches. Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 5 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use materials compatible with plate dowel system steel plate dowel and plastic dowel sleeves with integral fasteners for attachment to formwork. 3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. Refer to structural notes on the drawings. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 1. Where indicated install mechanical plugs for tie holes in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide other finishes as follows: 1. Grout-Cleaned Finish (Class A per ACI PRC-347): Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surface and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with 1:1 moisture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. a. Locations: Provide this finish only where indicated on the drawings. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI PRC-302.1 and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI PRC-302.1; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinous matrix co terrazzo, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. o 2. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1 R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. N a. Installation of sealant is recommended prior to installation of floor sealers to prevent `" the need for cleaning of saw cut joints for proper sealant adhesion. w E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as Q indicated on drawings. o w F. At interior slabs do not over trowel where concrete is to be left exposed to avoid slippery D surfaces when wet. Review finishing with Architect's representative prior to completing the U) work. 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI PRC-308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days by saturated burlap unless noted otherwise. a. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. 3. Where damp curing is not feasible due to location, and with written permission of SER, spray with an approved curing compound. In general, curing compound is not an acceptable substitute for damp curing. 3.09 MASS CONCRETE A. Unless otherwise noted, any concrete member with least dimension greater than 29 inches is defined as Mass Concrete. Smaller elements utilizing high strength concrete may be identified as Mass Concrete in the drawings or specification. B. Mass Concrete is subject to the following temperature limitations: Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 6 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Maximum internal temperature is 150 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Maximum differential (gradient) between internal (core) and nearby surface temperatures is 35 degrees Fahrenheit. Maximum differential between core and surface temperatures more than 20 feet apart is 40 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Contractor shall submit a Thermal Control and Placement Plan containing: 1. Calculations of maximum internal temperature and maximum gradient, based on the approved mix design or designs. 2. Required concrete temperature at time of placement(Maximum Placement Temperature). 3. Estimated set time and finishing plan. 4. Number and approximate location of temperature sensors, and measurement interval. 5. Intended blanketing, with assumed likely range of external temperatures during and after placement. Note that blankets may be required in warm weather to control temperature gradient. 6. Likely length of time that blankets are required to minimize gradient. 7. If necessary, Plan shall also include cooling through internal piping. 8. Through-thickness construction joints. 9. Placement methodology (bucketing, pumps, conveyors, etc.)and intended placement rate. 10. Placement intent for slabs (full thickness, or layers). D. On slabs, recheck surface elevations for changes due to subsidence or sloughing after initial screeding. E. Typical wet curing requirements apply to Mass Concrete, but blanket requirements in other sections are superseded by requirement C.5 above. Blankets are required in warm weather to reduce thermal gradient. Maintain blankets until core and surface temperatures are and are expected to remain within 40 degrees of one another; but blankets need not be maintained for more than two weeks. N 0 F. Typical cold weather temperature requirements apply to Mass Concrete unless superseded by the approved Thermal Control and Placement Plan. N N 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 w 4000 - Quality Requirements. o B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. w D C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Architect for review prior to U) commencement of concrete operations. — D. For testing requirements refer to structural notes on the drawings and, where applicable, as indicated below. E. Refer to Section 01 3510 - Structural Testing and Special Inspection Requirements for testing requirements. 3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. 1. Concrete damaged by the construction activities required to complete the Work of this section shall also be considered defective concrete. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 03 3000 - Page 7 of 7 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 04 0511 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. B. Grout for masonry. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 2023. B. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 2019a, with Editorial Revision. C. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 2023. D. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures 2022, with Errata. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE co A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract N Documents. N 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign w matter. Q 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS 0 LU A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable D building code, whichever is more stringent. U) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS A. Use only factory premixed packaged dry materials for mortar and grout, with addition of water only at project site. B. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification. C. Grout Mix Designs: 1. Bond Beams and Lintels: 2000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump; mix in accordance with ASTM C476. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Preblended and prepackaged Dry Mortar and Grout: ASTM C 270, Type Indicated. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M. 2. Masonry above grade: Type S. 3. Product: Provide packaged dry pre-blended mortar and grout products by Spec Mix or approved equivalent. 4. Color: Natural gray except as follows: a. Match existing color where existing masonry is present. b. Exposed locations in finished areas, interior and exterior, as selected by the Architect from the manufactures full range of color where not otherwise indicated. B. Water: Clean and potable. Project No. 23-29513 Section 04 0511 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation C. Bonding Agent: Latex type. 2.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. C. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. D. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 2.04 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing cementitious surfaces. B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with block masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet grout pressure. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding. co D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. N E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. N N 3.03 GROUTING A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other w limitations of Contract Documents. Q 0 B. Low-Lift Grouting: w 1. Limit height of pours to 4 feet 8 inches. U) 2. Limit height of masonry to 16 inches above each pour. Ln 3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured. 4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for more than 1-1/2 hours. C. High-Lift Grouting: 1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured before beginning pours. 2. Hollow Masonry: Limit lifts to maximum 4 feet 8 inches and pours to maximum height of 8 feet. 3. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 04 0511 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete block. B. Reinforcement and anchorage. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 2022. B. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units 2022. C. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 -Water Penetration Resistance— Design and Detailing 2017. D. BIA Technical Notes No. 28B - Brick Veneer/Steel Stud Walls 2005. E. BIA Technical Notes No. 46 - Maintenance of Brick Masonry 2017. F. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures 2022, with Errata. G. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; 1993. co 0 H. IMIAWC (HW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry " Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council; current edition. N N I. UL (FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS w A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. p B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and D masonry accessories. U) C. Joint Plans: Provide layout plans and elevations showing control and expansion joint locations. D. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative block and facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. E. Samples: Submit one sample of each accessory related to masonry and grout. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract Documents. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Conform to applicable code for UL (FRD)Assembly No. and ratings as indicated on the drawings. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on drawings for specific locations. 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block. Project No. 23-29513 Section 04 2000 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3. Nonloadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Hollow block. 4. Standard Face Units: Manufacturer's standard color and texture unless noted otherwise; suitable for specified finish where applicable. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 0511. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers: 1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com/#sle. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com/#sle. 3. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. 4. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi), deformed billet bars; uncoated. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com/#sle. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com/sle. c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. co PART 3 EXECUTION No 3.01 EXAMINATION N A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. w C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. Q 3.02 PREPARATION Lu w A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. U) B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. Project No. 23-29513 Section 04 2000 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -GENERAL A. Place masonry joint reinforcement as indicated on the drawings. 3.07 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. 1. Openings to 42 inches: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. 2. Openings from 42 inches to 78 inches: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web. 3. Openings over 48 inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. 4. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. C. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.08 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 8 inches either side of co opening. o N 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS N A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- w plane wall or partition movement. Q B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follow: o 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side D of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for U) application of sealant. — 2. Locate joints as indicated on drawings. a. If no joints are indicated, contractor shall provide for, at a minimum,joints as recommended in the referenced document. Refer to joint plan submittals for final location approval. 3. Space joints at no more than twice the height of the wall, but no more than 40' o.c. 4. Refer to Tek Note 10-02DContro/Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls—Empirical Method by the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA). 5. Final location of joints subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. C. Form expansion/control joints in brick made from clay as follows: 1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Locate joints as indicated on drawings. a. If no joints are indicated, contractor shall provide for, at a minimum,joints as recommended in the referenced document. Refer to joint plan submittals for final location approval. 3. Space joints at no more than twice the height of the wall, but no more than 25' o.c. 4. Refer to Technical Notes on Brick Construction 18AAccommodation Expansion of Brickwork by The Brick Industry Association (BIA). 5. Final location of joints subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. D. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints. E. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Project No. 23-29513 Section 04 2000 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation F. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 3/4 inch wide and deep. G. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 9200 for sealant performance. H. Form expansion joint as detailed on drawings. 3.10 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in items shown on the drawings and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 8 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or co strength of masonry work may be impaired. N 3.13 CLEANING N A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. w C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. o 1. Soiled surfaces shall include all surfaces left exposed to view. w D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. U) 3.14 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 04 2000 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud /joist framing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members 2016, with Supplement(2020). B. AISI S240 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing 2015, with Errata (2020). C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. D. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2023. E. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings 2020. F. ASTM A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members 2015. G. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories 2020. H. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. co I. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic, and Type II - Organic) 2019. o N 1.03 SUBMITTALS N A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. N B. Product Data: For lateral-force resisting systems, provide product data sheets on hold-down, w showing compliance with requirements. Q C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, 0 welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. D 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE U) A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located; include engineer's stamp. B. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Structural Framing: 1. ClarkDietrich: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2. MarinoWARE: www.marinoware.com/#sle. 3. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com. 4. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com/#sle. 5. Custom Stud, Inc: www.customstud.com. 6. Telling Industries: www.tellingindustries.com. 7. Super Stud Building Products, Inc: www.buysuperstud.com/#sle. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Connectors: 1. Same manufacturer as metal framing. Project No. 23-29513 Section 05 4000 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Simpson Strong-Tie: www.strongtie.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: Design cold-formed framing systems, components and connectors to withstand specified design loads in compliance with ICC (IBC), ASCE 7, AISI S100, and AISI S240. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, subject to the ductility limitations indicated in AISI S240. 1. Structural Grade: As required to meet design criteria. 2. Corrosion Protection Coating Designation: CP 90 in accordance with AISI S240. 2.04 STRUCTURAL FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Wall Studs and Track Sections: AISI S240; c-shaped studs and u-shaped track sections in stud-matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Corrosion Protection Coating Designation: CP 90 in accordance with AISI S240. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS CONNECTIONS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized per ASTM Al53/A153M. B. Anchorage Devices: Tapcon or equivalent type fasteners. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Galvanizing Repair: Touch up bare steel with zinc-rich paint in compliance with ASTM A780/A780M. B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20 Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. co 0 PART 3 EXECUTION N 3.01 EXAMINATION N N r A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. , 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL Q A. Install structural members and connections in compliance with ASTM C1007. o UJ 3.03 TOLERANCES D U) A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch. Ln B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 05 4000 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2019. B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 2022. C. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware 2023. D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength 2021. E. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 2023. F. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes 2022. G. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination 2020. H. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code-Steel 2020, with Errata (2023). I. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning 2018. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. co B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. N C. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size N and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details C14 where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. Q 2. Indicate unit identification mark and location for each unique item. w PART 2 PRODUCTS D U) 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL Ln A. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M. B. Steel Sections, Angles, and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, Grade A, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Color: Manufacturer's Standard. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Mark each item with its identification mark. Use a non-permanent method at units that will remain exposed; welding is not acceptable, it shall be ground smooth, filled, and primed by the supplier at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. Project No. 23-29513 Section 05 5000 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Furnish components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish. B. Other items indicated on the drawings. 2.04 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2 minimum. 1. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. 2. Prime Painting: One coat. a. Provide primer products indicated for surfaces to be primed and painted, Refer to Section 09 9113- Exterior Painting and Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. 2.06 CONCRETE ANCHORING SYSTEMS A. Approved Manufacturers/Products: 1. HILTI: www.us.hilti.com. co 2. MiTek: www.mitek-us.com. N 3. DeWALT: www.anchors.dewalt.com. 4. Red Head: www.itwredhead.com. N 5. Simpson Strong-Tie: www.strongtie.com. Lu PART 3 EXECUTION Q 3.01 EXAMINATION 0 LU A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. D U) 3.02 PREPARATION Ln A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Furnish setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 05 5000 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preservative treated wood materials. B. Fire retardant treated wood materials. C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. D. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware 2023. B. ASTM D2898 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing 2010 (Reapproved 2017). C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood 2023. E. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard 2021. F. WWPA G-5-Western Lumber Grading Rules 2021. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. co B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, and N installation. N PART 2 PRODUCTS c14 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS w A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. Q 1. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading o agency is specified, provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified w requirements. U) 2. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5. B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No.2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No.3. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Prefabricated Blocking Systems: DANBACK 3/4 inch standard/treated plywood or approved equivalent: www.danback.com. C. Dissimilar Material Separation Products: 1. Separate Treated Lumber from other metal products and flashings with Self-Adhering Flashing as follows: Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 1053 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation a. Provide Grace Vycor Plus or approved equal rubberized asphalt. Install according to manufacturers Instructions. Provide accessories for a complete installation. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with ground. 2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature, low hygroscopic type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated. co c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may C) N become wet. N C. Preservative Treatment: N 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. Lu a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Q 0 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category w UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative. D a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. U) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. D. All wood exposed to or in contact with masonry or concrete shall be Preservative Treated Wood. E. All wood within 12 inches of weather exposed masonry or concrete shall be separated with a dissimilar material separation products where a fluid applied or sheet product is not already specified or detailed. F. All wood exposed to or in contact with masonry or concrete shall be Preservative Treated Wood unless wood; wood associated with roofing installation shall be non-treated except where in contact with masonry or concrete located within 12 inches of weather exposed masonry or concrete; an alternate to using treated blocking at these locations is to separate blocking from masonry or concrete with the use of a dissimilar material Separation Products. G. Install dissimilar material separation products between all preservative treated lumber and metals and flashings. Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 1053 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation H. Securely install blocking, size within 1/16 of required dimension, and install plumb and level. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. F. Provide the following specific nonstructural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. co 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. N 10. All items indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. N 3.03 CLEANING N A. Waste Disposal: See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. w 1. Comply with applicable regulations. Q 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. o 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. w 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation U) facilities or"waste-to-energy"facilities. B. Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 1053 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Hardware. C. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Prefabricated Wood Blocking System. C. Section 12 3600 - Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard 2022. B. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)for Interior Applications 2022. C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition 2014, with Errata (2016). D. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)- North American Architectural Woodwork Standards 2021, with Errata. E. BH MA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware 2020. F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 2005. G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood 2019. co 1.04 SUBMITTALS No N A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. N B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, and accessories. 1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum. Lu 2. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS). o C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. w D D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, U) representing actual product, color, texture, and patterns. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; Graded in accordance with, Grade II/Custom; average moisture content of 5-10 percent; species as follows: 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 4100 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation interior grade adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for concealed components. B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with interior grade adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. C. Plywood for Non-Decorative Purposes: NIST PS 1, Interior rated adhesives, core of wood plies from listed species unless otherwise indicated, thickness as indicated or as required by application. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 -Tempered, 1/4 inch thick, smooth two sides (S2S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components indicated on drawings. 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arborite: www.arborite.com/#sle. 2. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle. 3. Lamin-Art, Inc: www.laminart.com. 4. Panolam Industries International, Inc: www.panolam.com/#sle. 5. Wilsonart LLC: www.wilsonart.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. C. Provide specific types as indicated. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, color and finish as selected by co Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. N 0 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, color and finish as selected by N Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. N 3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, color and finish as selected by "' Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. w 2.05 COUNTERTOPS Q A. Countertops: See Section 12 3600. 0 Lu 2.06 ACCESSORIES D U) A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, flat shaped; smooth finish; with or without self-locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness. 1. Color: Match adjacent plastic laminate. 2. Materials Thickness: a. Door and Drawer Edges: 0.118 inches. b. Other Edges: 0.018 inches. 3. Use at exposed sheet material edges and perimeter of all doors and drawers. 4. Products: a. WoodTape by Doellken-Woodtape: www.na.doellken.com. b. Canplast: www.canplast.com. c. Rehau: www.rehau.com. d. PVC Bumper Molding by Patwin Plastics: www.patwin.com. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color as selected by Architect. 2.07 HARDWARE Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 4100 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Additional Hardware Items: As detailed and noted on the casework sections and elevations. C. Locking Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports with locking clips, clear finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 1. Product: 8705CL 1/4" Pin Shelf Lock for 3/4" Shelf, Finish Clear manufactured by www.hardwareresources.com. D. Drawer and Door Pulls: As scheduled on the drawings. E. Keyed Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish. F. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: 100 lbs minimum. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide soft-close/stay closed type. 6. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc; Light-Duty Drawer Slides: www.accuride.com/#sle. b. Blum, Inc: www.blum.com/#sle. c. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle. d. Hettich America, LP: www.hettich.com/sle. e. Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. G. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with nickel-plated finish. 1. Manufacturers: co a. Hardware Resources; 22855-000: www.hardwareresources.com/#sle. N b. Hettich America, LP; Sensys: www.hettich.com/sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. N 2.08 FABRICATION LU A. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. Q B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. 0 LU C. Drawer Construction Technique: As specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality D Standards Illustrated. U) D. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 1. Provide separate base to be installed and leveled prior to cabinet installation. E. Finished Ends: Finish ends of all casework not hidden by permanent construction; including locations adjacent to appliances and removable lowers cabinets. F. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. G. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. H. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges. 2.09 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 4100 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade specified and as follows: E. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500, use systems preferred by manufacturers based usage type, or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. 1. Set separate base, plumb, level, and secure rigidly in-place prior to setting cabinets. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. F. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. G. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING co 0 A. Adjust installed work. N B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. N 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. Q END OF SECTION o UJ D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 06 4100 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not. C. Marking and identification of fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers, and smoke partitions, or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 2022. B. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems 2023a. C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products Current Edition. D. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide Current Edition. E. UL (FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Each respective trade shall provide submittals as it relates to their Scope of Work. C. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. co D. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. N E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. N F. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE w A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings o when tested in accordance with methods indicated. w 1. Listing in UL (FRD), FM (AG), or ITS (DIR)will be considered as constituting an D acceptable test report. U) 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc- es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Installer Qualifications: Personnel specializing and trained in performing the work of this section and: 1. Trained by manufacturer. C. Each respective trade shall perform the Work of this section as it relates to their Scope of Work. Coordinate the Work between all trades so that firestopping locations and adjacent Work are within the limitations of firestopping products to be used at each location. D. Prior to installation of any of the fire-resistive "through"or"membrane" penetration fire block systems and any fire-resistive "joint" systems, detailed testing, and installation information on each of the specific listed assemblies intended for use must be submitted to Building Official for code review. The specific assemblies must also be listed for each intended use (i.e. proper penetration size and rating condition and for the type of construction material that it is being used in/on). Each trade person responsible for sealing said conditions must provide this information to the building inspector for review prior to installation of any assembly. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 8400 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system that is listed by UL (FRD) and tested in accordance with ASTM E814 with F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in compliance with other specified requirements. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Intumescent Firestop Sealants 1. FlameSafe FS 1900 Intumescent Elastomeric Sealant. 2. 3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP25WB+ 3. A/D Firebarrier Intumescent Caulk. 4. Hilti USA 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. C. Endothermic Water-Based Sealants 1. FlameSafe FS 900 Endothermic Sealant 2. 3M Interam FireDam 150 Caulk 3. A/D Firebarrier Seal & Seal NS co 4. Hilti USA o 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. N D. Elastomeric Firestop Coating c14 1. FlameSafe FS2900 Intumescent Elastomeric Firestop Coating 2. 3M FireDam Spray w 3. A/D Firebarrier Spraymastic o 4. Hilti USA w 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. D E. Intumescent Firestop Putty L 1. FlameSafe FSP 1000 Intumescent Putty 2. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+ 3. A/D Firebarrier Putty 4. Hilti USA 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. F. Firestop Mortar 1. FlameSafe Mortar Seal 2. 3M Fire Barrier Mortar 3. A/D Firebarrier Mortar 4. Hilti USA 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. G. Firestop Bags 1. FlameSafe Intumescent Firestop Bags 2. A/D Firebarrier Pillows 3. Hilti USA 4. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. H. Firestop Sleeves 1. FlameSafe Intumescent Sleeve 2. Hilti USA 3. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 8400 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation I. Wrap Strips 1. FlameSafe Intumescent Wrap Strip 2. 3M Fire Barrier FS-195+ Wrap/Strip 3. A/D Firebarrier Wrap Strip 4. Hilti USA 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. J. Restraining Collars 1. FlameSafe FSRC 100/FSRC 150 Restraining Collars 2. 3M Fire Barrier RC-1 Restraining collar 3. A/D Firebarrier Collars & Collar Strips 4. Hilti USA 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. K. Composite Sheet 1. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195+ Composite Sheet 2. Hilti USA 3. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. L. Accessories 1. Forming or Damming Materials as specified by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could co adversely affect bond of firestopping material. No N B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. N C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. N 3.03 INSTALLATION w A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's Q instructions, completely closing openings. 0 w B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. D C. Install labeling required by code. Ln 1. Marking and Identification: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such identification shall: a. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces; b. Be located within 15 feet of the end of each wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partition; and c. Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height with a minimum 3/8 inch stroke in a contrasting color incorporating the suggested wording. "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER-PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" or other wording. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 8400 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018. B. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 2016 (Reapproved 2023). C. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid- Applied Sealants 2023. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical datasheets for each product to be used; include the following: 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 4. Substrates the product should not be used on. C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each co product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and N recommended tools. N D. Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified, submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection. E. Samples for Verification: Where custom sealant color is specified, obtain directions from Q Architect and submit at least two physical samples for verification of color of each required p sealant. w D F. Executed warranty. U) 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 5-year manufacturer warranty for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve a watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. C. Extended Correction Period: Correct defective work within 5-year period commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Base Manufacturer: Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Master Builders Solutions: www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us. 2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Dow Chemical Company: www.dow.com. Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 9200 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 4. Manus Products, Inc.: www.manus.net. 5. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 6. Red Devil: www.reddevil.com. 7. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. 8. Sika Corporation: www.usa.sika.com. 9. W.R.Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com. 10. Hilti: www.hilti.com. 11. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Interior Joints: Do not seal interior joints unless specifically indicated to be sealed. Interior joints to be sealed include, but are not limited to, the following items. a. Joints between door, window, and other frames and adjacent construction. b. Joints and penetrations of pipes, tubes, conduit, ductwork, and structural framing through walls, ceilings, and floors in finished and unfinished spaces. c. Joints indicated on the drawings. d. Interior joints to be sealed shall include those between non-conditioned spaces and conditioned spaces. e. Otherjoints indicated below. 2. Do not seal the following types of joints: a. Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover, or some other type of sealing device. b. Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. c. Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. d. Joints between suspended panel ceilings/grid and walls. N 0 B. Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Non-Wet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. N 2. Wall and Ceiling Joints in Wet Areas: Nonsag polyurethane sealant for continuous liquid `V immersion. ' w 3. Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Nonsag polyurethane non-traffic-grade sealant suitable for Q continuous liquid immersion. o 4. Joints between Fixtures in Wet Areas and Floors, Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant ui silicone sealant; Refer to colors below. U) 5. In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 6. Other Floor Joints: Self-leveling polyurethane traffic-grade sealant. C. Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms, restrooms, kitchens, food service areas, and food processing areas; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, food service equipment, countertops, cabinets, and other similar items. D. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as STC-rated, sound-rated, or acoustical. 2.03 JOINT SEALANTS -GENERAL A. Colors: Color shall be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range unless specifically indicated to be a specific color. 2.04 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Products: a. Tremsil 200 manufactured by Tremco Commercial Sealants. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 3. Products: Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 9200 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation a. Master Builders Solutions; MasterSeal NP1 or NP2: www.master-builders- solutions.com/en-us/#sle. b. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; Dymeric 240 FC or Dymonic FC: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. C. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non- bleeding, non-sagging; not intended for exterior use. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Products: a. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; Tremflex 834: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.05 SELF-LEVELING JOINT SEALANTS A. Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or multicomponent; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Products: a. THC-901, Vulkem 445SSL (also Dymonic FC, or Dymeric 240 FC) manufactured by Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing. b. MasterSeal SL 1, SL 2 (also NP 1, or NP 2 manufactured by Master Builders Solutions. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to, co compatible with specific sealant used, and recommended by backing and sealant o manufacturers for specific application. 1. Type for Joints Not Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type B - Bi- C14 Cellular Polyethylene. 2. Type for Joints Subject to Pedestrian or Vehicular Traffic: ASTM C1330; Type C -Closed w Cell Polyethylene. Q 3. Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. o Lu B. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and D recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. u) C. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, nonstaining, removable without adhesive residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants. D. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. E. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; nonstaining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. 3.03 INSTALLATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 9200 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Install this work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Provide joint sealant installations complying with ASTM C1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. H. Concrete Floor Joint Filler: After full cure, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 07 9200 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards- 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors 2022. C. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100)2023. D. ANSI/SDI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames 2020. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2023. F. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable 2023. G. ASTM Al01II/Al 011 M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, o Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and N Ultra-High Strength 2023. H. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 2020. `V I. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 2023. J. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Q 2023c. o w K. BHMA Al 56.115- Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames 2016. U) L. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017. M. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2002. N. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2011. O. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications For Receipt, Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2017. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 1113 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 3. Fleming Door Products, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 4. Mesker, dormakaba Group: www.meskeropeningsgroup.com/#sle. 5. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle. 6. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle. 7. Technical Glass Products: www.tgpamerica.com/#sle. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO)steel complying with ASTM Al011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS)Type B, for each. 2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 3. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated. 4. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush. c, 5. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and N NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA Al 56.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements." 6. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip w process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating Q thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames. p a. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines: Provide at least A25/ZF75 w (galvannealed)for interior applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed)or U) G60/Z180 (galvanized)for corrosive locations. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gauge, 0.042 inch, minimum. 2. Door Core Material: Polystyrene, 1 lbs/cu ft minimum density. a. Foam Plastic Insulation: Manufacturer's standard board insulation with maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 75, and maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84, and completely enclosed within interior of door. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. 4. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 1113 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Face welded type. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. 2. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. C. Frames Depth: Size frame depth to accommodate wall assembly thickness and to allow proper attachment to assembly components. 2.05 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Finish: Paint in field. Color as selected by the Architect. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Grout for Frames: Mortar grout complying with ASTM C476 with maximum slump of 4 inches as measured in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M for hand troweling in place; plaster grout and thinner pumpable grout are prohibited. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory-or shop-assembled frames. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment. 3.02 PREPARATION co A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior o to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION N A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. w B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. p C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that UJ pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. U) D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straightedge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 1113 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling mounted access units. B. Floor access door and frame units, interior. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough-in dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED ACCESS UNITS A. Basis of Design: 1. Type AP-1: OF-5000 by ACUDOR; Steel Trim, Steel Flush Face. 2. Type AP-2: DW-5040 by ACUDOR; Drywall Flange, Steel Flush Face. B. Manufacturers: 1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. -JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/#sle. 2. ACUDOR Products Inc: www.acudor.com/#sle. 3. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle. 4. Bilco Co: www.bilco.com. co 5. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com/#sle. o 6. Elmdor Stonemen: www.elmdorstoneman.com/#sle. 7. Dur-Red Products: www.dur-red.com. 8. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. N 9. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. w 10. Milcor, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. Q 11. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle. o 12. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D C. Wall and Ceiling Mounted Units: Factory fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units with U) corner joints welded, filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Style: As indicated by Basis of Design. 3. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 4. Steel Finish: Primed. 5. Primed and Factory Finish: Polyester powder coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Door/Panel Size: As indicated on the drawings. 7. Hardware: a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. b. Latch/Lock: Tamperproof tool-operated cam latch. 2.02 FLOOR MOUNTED ACCESS UNITS A. Basis of Design: BILCO Type J-AL flush mount frame, 300psf load rating with Type-FPG grating fall protection safety grating. B. Manufacturers: 1. Activar Construction Products Group -JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/#sle. 2. ACUDOR Products Inc: www.acudor.com/#sle. 3. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle. 4. BILCO Company: www.bilco.com/#sle. 5. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com/#sle. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 3100 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 6. Dur-Red Products: www.dur-red.com. 7. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 8. Karp Associates, Inc : www.karpinc.com. 9. Milcor, Inc : www.milcorinc.com. 10. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle. 11. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Floor Mounted Access Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Hardware: Stainless steel, Type 316. a. Hinges: Removable pin. b. Lock: Cylinder lock with latch, two keys for each unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 3100 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. B. Door hardware includes,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: co N O 1. Division 08 Section"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". �" 2. Division 08 Section"Flush Wood Doors". N 3. Division 08 Section"Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts". LU D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Q 0 1. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. Z) 2. ICC/IBC-International Building Code. U) 3. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 -Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes,Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard: 1. ANSIBHMA Certified Product Standards-A156 Series. 2. UL10C-Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. ANSI/UL 294-Access Control System Units. 4. UL 305 -Panic Hardware. 5. ANSI/UL 437-Key Locks. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 1 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details,material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,detailing,fabrication and assembly of door hardware,as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style,function, size,label,hand,and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set,cross-referenced to Drawings,both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. co e. Explanation of abbreviations,symbols, and codes contained in schedule. N f. Mounting locations for door hardware. N g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. UJ 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, o particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other w work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Z) U) Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the U) coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete(risers,point-to-point)access control system block wiring diagrams. C. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 2 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA)Certified Products Directory(CPD). co C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and o electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. N D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical o hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. w Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with Z) a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural cn Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,unless otherwise indicated. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label indicating compliance with the referenced testing standards. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 3 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building,purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys,cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. o 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. N 5. Review the required inspecting,testing,commissioning,and demonstration procedures N N r I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied w according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. Q 0 w 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Z) U) U) A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the"Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 4 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Door and Frame Preparation:Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared,reinforced and pre- wired(if applicable)to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01,General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection,cracking,or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes,and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of Substantial Completion. co N O N PART 2 -PRODUCTS N N r 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE w Q A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. Z) U) U) B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.Products are identified by using door hardware designations,as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Please note that ASSA ABLOY is transitioning the Yale Commercial brand to ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA. This affects only the brand name; the products and product numbers will remain unchanged. The brand transition is expected to be complete in or about May of 2024, and products shipping after that time will be branded ASSA ABLOY ACCENTRA. D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 5 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.2 BUTT HINGES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity:Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. C. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3'0":4-1/2"standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3'1"to 4'0": 5"standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. co b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges No unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. N N 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: LU a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set Q screw in hinge barrel that,when tightened into a groove in hinge pin,prevents removal o of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. Z) U) U) 5. Manufacturers: a. McKinney(MK)-TA/T4A Series, 5-knuckle. 2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSIBHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Manufacturers:. a. Pemko(PE). Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 6 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.4 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with MolexTM standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through- door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pemko(PE)-EL-CEPT Series. b. Securitron(SU)-EL-CEPT Series. B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve(12)wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. co 1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: o N a. McKinney(MK)-Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. N b. McKinney(MK)-Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. w 2. Manufacturers: Q 0 w a. McKinney(MK)-QC-C Series. Z) U) 2.5 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: Provide products conforming to ANSIBHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. 2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8"in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 5. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). b. Trimco(TC). Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 7 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSIBHMA A156.6 door pushes and pull units of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges,secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pulls,where applicable, shall be provided with a 10" clearance from the finished floor on the push side to accommodate wheelchair accessibility. 5. Fasteners:Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). b. Trimco(TC). 2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. co N O 1. Manufacturers: N N a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA). b. Schlage B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and w types: Z) U) 1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim cylinders with back plate,flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks. 4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks. 5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 6. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. C. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System:Field verify and key cylinders to match Owner's existing system. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 8 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two(2) 2. Master Keys(per Master Key Level/Group):Five(5). 3. Construction Keys(where required): Ten(10). E. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. F. Key Registration List(Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. 2.7 KEY CONTROL A. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self- locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment(LU). co b. MMF Industries(MM). C" 0 C. Telkee(TK). N N r 2.8 MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES w A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational o Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed mortise locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet j all functions and features as specified herein. cn U) 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)- 8200 Series. b. Schlage L-Series 2.9 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSIBHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed cylindrical locksets. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)- IOX Line. b. Schlage ND Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 9 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.10 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated,and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes:For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches:BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches:BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes:BHMA A156.16. 2.11 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES co N A. General Requirements:All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: cC).i N 1. Exit devices shall have a five-year warranty. N 2. At doors not requiring a fire rating,provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by Q manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. o 3. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors,provide devices complying with NFPA 80 w and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper U) fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and U) template book for specific requirements. 4. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 5. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder,provide a cylinder(Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets,provide devices designed for maximum 2"wide stiles. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 10 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 9. Dummy Push Bar:Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSIBHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed exit devices. Listed manufacturers shall meet all functions and features as specified herein. 1. Electromechanical exit devices shall have the following functions and features: a. Universal Molex plug-in connectors that have standardized color-coded wiring and are field configurable in fail safe or fail secure and operate from 12vdc to 24vdc regulated. b. EcoFlex or equivalent technology that reduces energy consumption up to 92% as certified by GreenCircle. C. Options to be available for request-to-exit or enter signaling, latchbolt and touchbar monitoring. d. Field configurable electrified trim to fail-safe or fail-secure that operates from 12- 24VDC. e. Five-year limited warranty for electromechanical features. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)-80 Series. b. Von Duprin 98/99(VD) co N O 2.12 DOOR CLOSERS N N A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: UJ 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the o same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to w be non-handed with full sized covers. Z) 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed vii for use of fire rated doors. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act,provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 11 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Heavy duty surface mounted door closers shall have a 30-year warranty. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent—281 series b. LCN—4040XP 2.13 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1"LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. co 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16" above the o bottom of the door,provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. N 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: UJ Q a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade,050-inch thick. ui w Z) 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the U) Hardware Sets.Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). b. Trimco(TC). 2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 12 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSIBHMA A156.16, Grade 1 door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate,provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood(RO). b. Trimco(TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Rixson(RF). b. Sargent Manufacturing(SA). 2.15 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS co A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below o or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide N non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. UJ B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a Q testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings 0 UJ indicated,based on testing according to UL 1784. Z) U) 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-IOC. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 13 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation F. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko(PE). 2. Reese Enterprises,Inc. (RE). 2.16 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into a V diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT,N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA)-3280 Series. b. Securitron(SU)-DPS Series. B. Switching Power Supplies: Provide power supplies with either single or dual voltage configurations at 12 or 24VDC. Power supplies shall have battery backup function with an integrated battery charging circuit and shall provide capability for power distribution, direct lock control and Fire Alarm Interface (FAI) through add on modules. Power supplies shall be expandable up to 16 individually protected outputs. Output modules shall provide individually protected, continuous co outputs and/or individually protected,relay controlled outputs. N N 1. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. UJ 2. Manufacturers: Q 0 a. Securitron(SU)-AQD Series. UJ b. Altronix(AS)-Maximal 3. U) 2.17 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.18 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSIBHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 14 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,labeled fire door assembly construction,wall and floor construction,and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI At 15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. co 0 N 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and N adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking c„ devices;closing devices; and seals. UJ B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable Q 0 publications,unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: w Z) U) 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural U) Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 15 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections "Closeout Procedures". Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed and corrected,indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected. 1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video Recordings. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware co installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible No time frame. N N B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. UJ C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain Q conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 0 UJ Z) U) 3.7 DEMONSTRATION U) A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. 1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors,or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. 4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate solutions and proposals as needed. Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 16 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1.MK-McKinney 2.PE-Pemko 3. SU- Securitron 4. RO-Rockwood 5. SA- SARGENT 6.NO-Norton 7.RF-Rixson 8. OT-Other Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 103, 108,202,209 3 Hinge,Full Mortise,Hvy Wt T4A3786 4.5 x 4.5 26D MK 1 Pull x Pull Plate 110 x 70C 32D RK co 1 Push Plate 70C 32D RK o N 1 Dead Bolt 4877 32D SA N 1 Surface Closer 281 UO EN SA N 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2"LDW CSK BEV 32D RK w 1 Wall Stop 406 32D RK o w Z) U) U) Set: 2.0 Doors: 216,217 1 Hinge,Full Mortise,Hvy Wt T4A3786 4.5 x 4.5 32D MK 1 Mortise lock with Indicator V54 x 8257 x VN1 x L 26D SA 1 Surface Closer 281 UO EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2"LDW CSK BEV 32D RK 1 Wall Stop 406 32D RK END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 7100- Page 17 of 17 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W Z) U) U) SECTION 08 8300 MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. GANA(GM)- GANA Glazing Manual 2022. B. GANA(SM) - GANA Sealant Manual 2008. C. GANA(TIPS) - Mirrors: Handle with Extreme Care (Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors) 2011. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA(GM), GANA(SM), GANA(GM), and GANA(SM)for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA(TIPS). 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing co compounds. N 0 1.06 WARRANTY N A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. C14 B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. w PART 2 PRODUCTS o 2.01 MANUFACTURERS D U) A. Mirrors: U) 1. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com/#sle. 2. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com/#sle. 3. Trulite Glass and Aluminum Solutions: www.trulite.com. 4. Walker Glass Company Ltd: www.walkerglass.com/#sle. 5. Dulles Glass & Mirror: www.dullesglassandmirror.com. 6. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 -Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q1 (high- quality mirrors); silvering, protective coating, and quality requirements in compliance with ASTM C1503. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Size: As noted on drawings. 3. Glass: Clear. 4. Edge: Flat Polish Edge. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mirror Adhesive: Silicone pre-polymer based, chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 8300 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA (TIPS) and manufacturers recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, and free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors in proper place with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove labels after work is complete. B. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 08 8300 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 09 0561 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of floor coverings: 1. Resilient tile and sheet. 2. Carpet tile. 3. Any type of flooring that can trap moisture and cause failure of setting adhesives. B. Removal of existing floor coverings. C. Preparation of new and existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. D. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH). E. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or alkalinity (pH)conditions. 1. Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not under Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into the contract, a contract modification will be issued. F. Patching compound. G. Remedial floor coatings. H. Preparation of new and existing wood-based floors and subfloors for installation of new floor coverings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS co A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Additional requirements relating to testing agencies o and testing. N 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS N A. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or[50 mm] Cube Specimens)2021. w B. ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters, and p Gypsum Concrete 2020. w D C. ASTM F1869- Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete U) Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride 2023. — D. ASTM F2170- Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes 2019a. E. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings 2018. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Visual Observation Report: For existing floor coverings to be removed. C. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing: 1. Moisture and alkalinity (pH) limits and test methods. 2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. D. Remedial Materials Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each product to be used for remediation. E. Testing Agency's Report: 1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful. 2. Summary of conditions encountered. 3. Moisture and alkalinity (pH)test reports. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 0561 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 4. Copies of specified test methods. 5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces. 6. Submit report to Architect. 7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing. F. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. G. Copy of RFCI (RWP). H. Remedial Materials Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each product to be used for remediation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The flooring contractor shall begin tracking and monitoring Moisture and pH testing results 4 weeks prior to scheduled installation of resilient flooring. B. Report all results, in writing, to the General Contractor and Architect. C. Moisture and pH testing may be performed by flooring installers own personnel. D. In the event that test values exceed manufacturer's limits, a third party testing agency may be brought in to retest and verify the results. 1. The Owner shall pay for third party testing. E. Moisture and alkalinity(pH)testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified. 1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with project Owner's project contact information. G. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing: co 1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency. C) N 2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start. 3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities. N 4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions. 5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing Lu will start. Q 0 H. Remedial Coating Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type w specified in this section, trained by or employed by coating manufacturer, and able to provide at D least 3 project references showing at least 3 years' experience installing moisture emission Ln coatings. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging; include installation instructions. C. Keep materials from freezing. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics: 1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor, floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 0561 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation edges. 2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited. 3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate. 4. Products: a. H.B. Fuller Construction Products, Inc; TEC Feather Edge Skim Coat: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. b. USG Corporation; Durock Brand Advanced Skim Coat Floor Patch: www.usg.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single-or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity (pH)found, and suitable for adhesion of flooring without further treatment. 1. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX MC RAPID: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Custom Building Products; TechMVC Moisture Vapor and Alkalinity Barrier: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c. GCP Applied Technologies; Kovara AB 300: www.gcpat.com/#sle. d. H.B. Fuller Construction Products, Inc; TEC LiquiDam with TEC Level Set 200 SLU: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. e. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating with co LATICRETE NXT Level Plus: www.laticrete.com/#sle. o f. Maxxon Corporation; Aquafin SG2: www.maxxon.com/#sle. g. SCHONOX SHP (Special Acrylic Primer), EPA (Two-Part, Epoxy Based Moisture N Mitigation System), and ZM (Cement Based Self-Leveling Compound by SCHONOX HPS North America: www.hpsubfloors.com. w h. Sika Corporation; Sikafloor Moisture Tolerance Epoxy Primer and Sikafloor Self- Leveling Moisture Tolerant Resurfacer: www.sikafloorusa.com. o i. Sinak: www.sinak.com. w D j. Tnemec Company, Inc; Series 208 Epoxoprime MVT: www.tnemec.com/#sle. U) k. USG Corporation; Durock Brand CST Moisture Vapor Reducer: www.usg.com/#sle. — I. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A. Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1. Preliminary cleaning. 2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. 3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Alkalinity(pH)tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Specified remediation, if required. 6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required. 7. Grinding, filling, and leveling, as required. 8. Other preparation specified. 9. Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 10. Protection. B. Notification: Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 0561 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Notify the Owner/Architect immediately upon discovery of test results that inhibit proper installation of flooring products. Owner/Architect will determine how to proceed. C. Remediations: 1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction. 2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating or remedial sheet membrane over entire suspect floor area. 3. Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area. 3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS A. Comply with local, State, and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings, as applicable to floor covering being removed. B. Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local, State, and federal regulations and as specified. 3.03 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. N 0 3.04 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING N A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test N method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements w of this section. Q 0 C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows. w D D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test U) method, as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours. F. Report: Report the information required by the test method. 3.05 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements of this section. C. Test in accordance with ASTM F2170 Procedure A and as follows. D. Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method, as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM test values and do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value exceeds 75 percent relative humidity. F. Report: Report the information required by the test method. 3.06 ALKALINITY TESTING Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 0561 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if alkalinity (pH)test value is over 10. 3.07 PREPARATION A. See individual floor covering section(s)for additional requirements. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints, and other irregularities with patching compound. D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints. 3.08 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.09 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A. Install in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 0561 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Acoustic insulation. D. Gypsum wallboard. E. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas, Gypsum-Based Board Tile Backer. F. Joint treatment and accessories. G. Prefabricated Wood Blocking System. H. Drywall Grid Suspension System. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board 2017 (Reapproved 2022). B. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 2022. C. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members 2018. D. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing 2023. E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive co Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products 2020. N F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 2020. N G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel "' Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm)to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness 2022. w H. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of o Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs 2022. w D I. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum U) Veneer Base 2019. J. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 2017. K. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 2021. L. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements 2009 (Reapproved 2016). M. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 2022. N. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products 2021. O. GA-214- Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association; 2021. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the location of all expansion joints in plan and elevation view. Include details at intersections of walls, floors, ceilings, and other construction. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing, with minimum five years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 2116 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. 2. Walls indicated to received sound insulation that are not indicated to meet an STC rating are not intended to be constructed as an acoustic assembly. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers- Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. ClarkDietrich: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle. 4. The Steel Network, Inc: www.steelnetwork.com. 5. Custom Stud, Inc: www.customstud.com. 6. Telling Industries: www.buildstrong.com. 7. Super Stud Building Products, Inc: www.buysuperstud.com. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Non-structural Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf. 1. Shapes and Sizes: As indicated on the drawings and as follows. a. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs. b. Runners: "U" shaped, sized to match studs. co C. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of N sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track. N D. Grid Suspension Systems: Steel grid system of main tees and support bars connected to structure using hanging wire. w 1. Main runners with double stitched web for added strength and knurled face for easier Q screw installation. 0 2. Cross tees feature staked-on end tabs for optimal tightness and ease of installation; D Stepped-end design featured on cross tees U) 3. Material: Classified Heavy Duty per ASTM C635/C635M; Utilizes G40 hot-dipped galvanized construction for superior corrosion resistance. 4. Products: a. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System: www.usg.com/#sle. b. Armstrong; Drywall Grid System: www.armstrongceilings.com. c. Certainteed; Dywall Suspension System: www.certainteed.com. d. Rockfon; Chicago Metallic Drywall Grid: www.rockfon.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers- Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com. 4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 5. PABCO Gypsum: www.pabcogypsum.com. 6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 2116 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 3. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch. C. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile and wet walls (walls with plumbing fixtures) as required by code. Do not use this type of backing board in wet areas like tub and shower surrounds. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Edges: Tapered. 2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 or more inches as required to fill wall depth. 1. ASTM E84 surface burning characteristics: Flame Spread Index 25 or less; Smoke Developed Index 450 or less. B. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil thick. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel, rolled zinc, rigid plastic, or aluminum, unless noted otherwise. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. a. Products for specific applications: 1) Expansion Joints (V-Groove Joint): Trim-Tex#093V Expansion joint or approved equal shall be used at expansion joints in flat wall or ceiling co N applications. C) N 2) Angled Joints: Trim-Tex Magic Corner or approved equal shall be used at angular walls and ceilings. N 3) Wall Termination: Trim-Tex Tear Away XT Extra Tall Masking or approved equal shall be used at all locations where new construction terminates into w existing construction or non-gypsum construction. Q 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints, provide U- 0 bead at exposed panel edges. D 3. Products: U) a. Same manufacturer as framing materials. Ln b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phiIlipsmfg.com/#sle. c. Trim-Tex Inc.: www.trim-tex.com. d. Fry Reglet: www.fryreglet.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Paper Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Joint Compound: Drying type, vinyl-based, ready or field-mixed. 3. Joint Compound (Optional): Setting type, field-mixed. E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inches in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion-resistant. F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion-resistant. G. Prefabricated Blocking Systems: DANBACK 3/4 inch standard/treated plywood or approved equal: www.danback.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 2116 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Drywall Grid Suspension System Ceilings: Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of: 1. Wall-mounted cabinets. 2. Plumbing fixtures. 3. Toilet partitions. 4. Toilet accessories. 5. Wall-mounted door hardware. 6. All other items indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. N 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing N members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. N 3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where firestopping is provided. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION p A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end D joints, especially in highly visible locations. U) U) B. Provide solid continuous shims under first layer of gypsum board as necessary to minimize variations in plane. Tolerance of surface shall be as indicated. C. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. D. Installation on framing: Use screws for attachment of boards. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows: 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls, soffits, and ceilings in any direction. 2. At intersections of soffits and intersecting walls. 3. At intersection of half height wall and intersecting walls. 4. At locations indicated on the drawings. 5. Other locations where cracking may occur due to changes in height and structure. 6. All jointing locations shall be indicated on shop drawings. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, embed with drying or setting joint compound and finish with drying or setting joint compound. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 2116 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 (additional reference guideline; GA-214- Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish), as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas including the following: (Level 5 shall be a thin skim coat of joint compound trowel applied; no spray or roller applied products will be accepted.) a. Walls that are perpendicular to large glazed openings where glazed openings are 50% or more of the area of the wall, within the room, in which they are located. b. Tall wall 16'-0" and taller. c. Long walls and ceilings 30'-0" and longer. d. Large wall and ceilings area of 500 square feet and larger. e. Walls with glass-mat-faced wallboard products. f. Walls, ceilings, and areas specifically indicated on the drawings. 2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. a. No visible defects should be apparent under normal lighting conditions. Provide Level 5 finish where defects become apparent at no additional cost to the Owner. b. Contractors that cannot guarantee their Level 4 finish will be free of visible defects under normal lighting conditions should provide a Level 5 finish. c. If the Architect or Owner is unsatisfied with a Level 4 finish due to visible defects under normal lighting conditions then a Level 5 finish shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. No exceptions. 3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. co 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. N 2. Tapered edges of gypsum board that are not located at taped and filled joints shall also be filled and sanded smooth to match the plane of the wall. N 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet Q in any direction. o END OF SECTION w U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 2116 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 09 3000 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Non-ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction and fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Al08/A118/A136.1 - Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile 2020. 1. ANSI Al08/A118/A136.1 - Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile 2020. 2. ANSI A118.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar 2019. 3. ANSI A118.12 -American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation 2014 (Reaffirmed 2019). B. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation 2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. co Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. N C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples in actual sizes illustrating color and pattern for each N tile product specified. c14 D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. Q 2. Extra Tile: 2 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not less than p 3 of each type. w D 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE U) A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI Al08/A118/A136.1 and TCNA(HB)on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Tile Finishes: 1. Products as scheduled on the drawings including: a. Tile Flooring. b. Wall Tiles. 2. Other Approved Manufacturers: a. As listed below; However, submit samples during the bidding process for Architect's review and approval. b. Samples must be submitted a minimum of 12 days before bids are due to allow Architect adequate time to compare product samples before approving equivalent products. c. Products that are not submitted for approval will not be accepted at any point during the shop drawing process or construction. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 3000 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Products: As scheduled on the drawings. 2. Applications: a. Open edges of wall and floor tile where a finished tile edge is not provided or another type of termination is not indicated on the drawings. 3. Manufacturers: a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle. b. M-D Building Products: www.mdteam.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. 1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond coat is indicated. 2. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. c. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand: www.prospec.com. d. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. e. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. f. Tec Specialty: www.tecspecialty.com. g. MAPEI Corporation: www.mapei.us. h. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc: www.tecspecialty.com. co N i. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. N 2.04 GROUTS N A. Chemical Resistant Grout: ANSI A118.3 and A118.6, conforms to ASTM C267, pre-mixed `V ready-to-use grout with color-coated quartz. w 1. Basis of Design: MAPEI Flexcolor CQ as schedueled on the drawings. Q 2. Color(s): As scheduled on the drawings. o 3. Other approved manufacturers products: w a. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com. U) b. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. — c. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. d. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand: www.prospec.com. e. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. f. Tec Specialty: www.tecspecialty.com. g. MAPEI Corporation: www.mapei.us. h. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc: www.tecspecialty.com. i. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI Al 18.12; not intended as waterproofing. 1. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum. 2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/8 inch gap, minimum. a. Cracks exceeding 1/8 inch shall be treated in accordance with TCNA handbook. Do not exceed the limitation of each product. Provide a combination of product when required to isolate larger cracks, sawed joints, and construction joints. 3. Description and Locations: Sheet membrane and liquid applied materials for isolating cracks and joints in floor; covering of entire floor is not intended unless specifically noted or required by flooring manufacturer. 4. Products: a. Laticrete 170 Sound N' Crack Isolation Mat. b. Mapeguard 2 by Mapei. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 3000 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation c. NobleSeal TS by the Noble Company. d. CrackBuster Pro Crack Prevention Mat Underlayment by Custom Building Products. e. TEC HydraFlex with Mesh by Fuller Construction Products, Inc. f. RedGard with Mesh by Custom Building Products. g. Mapelastic Cl with Mesh by MAPEI. h. GoldPlus with Mesh by Bostik. i. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable co N flatness tolerances. C) N D. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA(HB) c14 recommendations. E. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. Q F. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make o grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. LU G. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. U) H. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. J. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. L. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. 3.03 INSTALLATION - FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA(HB) Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Isolate cracks and joints in concrete floor with crack isolation membrane. 3.04 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCNA(HB) Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 3000 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings and coating (where applicable), cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F1066- Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile 2004 (Reapproved 2018). B. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base 2021. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, co and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. o E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. N 2. Extra Flooring Material: 20 square feet of each type and color. 3. Extra Wall Base: 20 linear feet of each type and color. w 4. Extra Stair Materials: Quantity equivalent to 5 percent of each type and color. Q 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE UJ w A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products U) specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing resilient flooring installation, with minimum of five years of documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Resilient Flooring: 1. Products as scheduled on the drawings including: a. Tile Flooring. b. Resilient Base. 2. Other Approved Manufacturers: a. As listed below; However, submit samples during the bidding process for Architect's review and approval. b. Samples must be submitted a minimum of 12 days before bids are due to allow Architect adequate time to compare product samples before approving equivalent products. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 6500 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation c. Products that are not submitted for approval will not be accepted at any point during the shop drawing process or construction. B. Other Approved Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style B, Cove. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. d. Allstate: www.allstaterubber.com. e. nora: www.norarubber.com. f. Flexco: www.flexcofloors.com. 2. Height: 4 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: As scheduled on the drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings, Nosings, Transitions, and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. 1. Products: As scheduled on the drawings. co D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. N PART 3 EXECUTION N N 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks Lu that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface o hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. w B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of U) work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. Ln 1. Fill all voids with approved products to create a solid and continuous surface at all resilient base locations. C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with Section 09 0561. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 6500 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION -TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 48 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Minimum 24 inches to splice from any outside corner. D. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. E. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Where required and/or recommended seal and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; 2 coats minimum. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. co B. Contractor shall furnish and install all waxing of resilient flooring where manufacturer's N installation and/or maintenance instructions require it to be installed. Waxing shall be completed prior to substantial completion. N END OF SECTION LU Q 0 LU D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 6500 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 09 6623 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Epoxy matrix terrazzo with ground and polished finish. B. Divider strips. C. Termination edging. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete subfloor with steel trowel finish. B. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings and coating (where applicable), cleaning, and preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICRI 310.2R- Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair 2013. B. NTMA(GRAD) -Aggregate Gradation Standards Current Edition. C. NTMA(EPDXY) - Epoxy Terrazzo Specifications Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for divider strips, control joint strips, expansion joints, and sealer; include printed copy of current NTMA recommendations for type of terrazzo specified. 1. Include data for edge, termination, and similar strips and supports. co C. Shop Drawings: Indicate divider strip and control and expansion joint layout, and details of N adjacent components. For precast units, detail profile and anchorage requirements. 1. Include layout and details of all edge, termination, and similar strips and supports. N D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating color, chip size and variation, chip gradation, matrix color, and typical divider strip. w E. Cleaning and Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, stripping, and sealing. p 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE w D A. Perform work in accordance with NTMA recommendations as posted at their web site at U) www.ntma.com. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store terrazzo materials in a dry, secure area. B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. C. Keep products away from fire or open flame. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 50 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. B. Maintain temperature within specified range 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of flooring. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design - Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring: Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies; Terroxy Resin Systems: www.tmsupply.com/#sle. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers - Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring: 1. Hi-Tek Polymers, Inc: www.hitekpolymers.com. 2. Key Resin Company: www.keyresin.com. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company: General Polymers Brand: www.generalpolymers.com. 4. Sika Corporation: www.sikafloorusa.com. 5. Terrazzco, a brand of Concord Terrazzo Company, Inc: www.terrazzco.com/sle. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 6623 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 6. Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies: www.tmsupply.com. 2.02 EPDXY MATRIX TERRAZZO APPLICATIONS A. Floors: 1. Thickness: 3/8 inch, nominal. 2. Aggregate Type: Marble chips. 3. Aggregate Size: No. 2. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Epoxy Matrix Terrazzo: Aggregate and matrix mix applied to substrate, troweled flat, and ground smooth. B. Matrix: Two component resin and epoxy hardener with mineral filler and color pigment, non- volatile, thermo-setting. C. Aggregate: Type as indicated; sized in accordance with NTMA aggregate gradation standards; color(s) as indicated, uniform in color. D. Finishing Grout: Epoxy, color to match terrazzo matrix. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Divider Strips: 1/8 inch thick zinc exposed top strip, zinc coated steel concealed bottom strip, with anchoring features. B. Control Joint Strips: 1/8 inch nominal width zinc exposed top strips, zinc coated steel concealed bottom strips, 1/8 inch wide neoprene filler strip between vertical strips, with anchoring features. C. Divider and Control Joint Strip Height: To suit thickness of terrazzo topping, with allowance for grinding. D. Base Cap, Base Divider Strip, and Separator Strip: Match divider strips. N 0 E. Edge and Termination Strips: Match divider strips. Provide support where structure is not N supported at locations such as expansion joints and similar locations. N F. Sealer: Colorless, non-yellowing, penetrating liquid type to completely seal matrix surface; not N detrimental to terrazzo components. w G. Wood Subfloor Joint Tape: Cloth type. o H. Subfloor Filler: Latex type. w D PART 3 EXECUTION U) 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive terrazzo. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that wood sub-floors have 12 percent maximum moisture content. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for terrazzo installation by testing for moisture vapor emission, internal relative humidity, and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by terrazzo materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of foreign matter. B. Prepare concrete surfaces according to ICRI 310.2R. C. Install supports for control joint strips, divider strips, edge strips, termination strips, and other similar accessories where not otherwise supported by adjacent construction. D. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install control joint strips straight and flat to locations indicated. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 6623 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Install divider strips according to pattern approved on shop drawings. C. Install base and border divider and control joint strips to match floor pattern. D. Install edge and termination strips at all open edges, not concealed by other finishes, including edges that terminate against interior walls, open floor edges, and similar types of locations. E. Install terminating cap strip at top of base; attach securely to wall substrate. F. Place terrazzo mix over substrate to thickness indicated. 3.04 FINISHING A. Finish terrazzo to NTMA requirements. B. Grind terrazzo surfaces with power disc machine; sequence with coarse to fine grit abrasive, using a wet method or using a dry grinder with vacuum to control dust. C. Apply grout to fill voids exposed from grinding. D. Remove grout coat by grinding, using a fine grit abrasive. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat Surface: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Level (Except Surfaces Sloping to Drain): 1/8 inch. 3.06 CLEANING A. Immediately after terrazzo has dried, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect finished terrazzo from damage due to subsequent construction until Date of Substantial N Completion. N END OF SECTION N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 6623 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 09 7200 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and prime painting. B. Wall covering. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Coating Systems 2020. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive. C. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 8 1/2 by 11 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Wall Covering Materials: 25 linear feet of each color and pattern of wall covering; N store where directed. N 3. Package and label each roll by manufacturer, color and pattern, and destination room N number. c14 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE w A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least five years of documented experience. o 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING D U) A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability. Ln B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design - Wall Coverings: As scheduled on the drawings. B. Other Approved Manufacturers: 1. As listed below; However, submit samples during the bidding process for Architect's review and approval. 2. Samples must be submitted a minimum of 12 days before bids are due to allow Architect adequate time to compare product samples before approving equivalent products. 3. Products that are not submitted for approval will not be accepted at any point during the shop drawing process or construction. C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers -Wall Coverings: Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 7200 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2.02 WALL COVERINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to surface texture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. C. Termination Trim: Extruded plastic, clear. D. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. E. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Alkyd enamel type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and comply with requirements of wall covering manufacturer. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft. 3.02 PREPARATION co A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. N 0 B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. N C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, c14 escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Lu D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. o E. Marks: Seal with shellac those that may bleed through surface finishes. w D F. Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth. U) G. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use wall covering in roll number sequence. C. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. D. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. E. Butt edges tightly. F. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. G. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. H. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. I. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. J. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll. K. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. L. Install termination trim. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 7200 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation M. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 7200 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Exposed surfaces of primed and unprimed metal items in finished areas unless specifically indicated to not be painted. 3. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, and pipes, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating parts of equipment. co 5. Floors, unless specifically indicated. o 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. N N 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Joint and surface treatment prior to painting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS o A. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. D 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS U) A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency current edition. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications 2023. C. MPI (APSM)- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual Current Edition. D. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). E. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 2007. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number(e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of substitutions proposed. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 9123 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation C. Samples: Submit three paper"draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, discuss sheen options with Architect before preparing samples, to eliminate sheens definitely not required. 3. Allow 15 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. 4. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not to be painted, such as factory finished items, have been approved. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Do not provide or leave extra paint materials for the Owner. 3. Do provide product info, color names, and installation locations for all products and colors. Information shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS N 0 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature" ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. N N B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. w C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. o PART 2 PRODUCTS w D 2.01 MANUFACTURERS U) A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. B. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams: www.sherwin-williams.com. 2. Other Manufacturers: Approved products shall meet performance and physical characteristics of base manufacturer(basis of design) product including published ratio of solids by volume, plus or minus two percent. C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Submit product information for each line of paint for Architect's approval. Substitutions of Base Manufacturer's products may not be accepted during the shop drawing process. 1. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle. 2. Benjamin Moore &Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 3. Carboline: www.carboline.com. 4. Diamond Vogel Paints: www.diamondvogel.com/#sle. 5. Hallman Lindsay Paint of Wisconsin: www.hallmanlindsay.com. 6. IdeaPaint: www.ideapaint.com. 7. ICP Group: www.icpgroup.com. 8. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 9. Pratt& Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com/#sle. 10. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 9123 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 11. Tnemec: www.tnemec.com. 12. Valspar Corporation: www.valsparpaint.com/#sle. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES -GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. a. Spayed finish; is preferred on all metal surfaces; is required on the following surfaces: 1) Metal doors and frames; prior to hardware installation. 2) Metal door frames for wood doors; prior to hardware installation. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Provide commercial grade paint systems by approved paint manufacturer for substrates not specifically covered under paint systems. a. Consult with Architect/Engineer/Designer for approval of additional products and systems. Provide quantifiable product information. 4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in co the following: o a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. N 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, `V Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added w at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Q D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected o later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. LU E. Colors: As indicated on drawings. U) 1. Where indicated or scheduled colors do not match the paint product lines indicated below it is anticipated that colors will be color matched; product lines below are intended to set a level of standard for the product lines used for each application. 2. Locations Not Indicated: Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 4. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. F. Coats: The number of coats specified, are based on manufacturer's recommendations. Provide for additional coats, as necessary, for complete coverage and true color. Additional coats due to a lack of coverage shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. No exceptions. G. Coverage: Do not stretch products beyond their recommended coverage rate nor install fewer coats than specified regardless of appearance after previous coats are applied. Thin product application may show surface imperfections or inconsistencies that would otherwise not be visible. Additional coats due to a lack of proper coverage shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. No exceptions. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR A. Paint Product: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy (Single-Component) 1. Primer: Prime and/or touch up as per Manufacturers recommended Specifications in accordance with specified Product. 2. Number of Paint Coats Over Primer: Two. 3. Types of Substrates: Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 9123 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation a. Steel. 4. Sheen: As scheduled on the drawings. 5. Location Types: a. Hollow metal doors and frames. B. Paint Product: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 1. Primer: One coat primer sealer in all locations; primer shall be installed under paint products even if product is considered self-priming. 2. Number of Paint Coats Over Primer: Two. 3. Types of Substrates: a. Gypsum board. 4. Sheen: As scheduled on the drawings. 5. Locations Types: a. Walls unless noted otherwise. b. Ceilings unless noted otherwise. c. Soffits unless noted otherwise. d. Bulkheads unless noted otherwise. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared. N 0 B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any N condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory w preparation before proceeding. o E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. w D F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply U) finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: — 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask and/or protect all surfaces, appurtenances not affiliated with coating process, including but not limited to electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. 3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated. 3.03 APPLICATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 9123 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual". C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. E. Painting shall be free from paint runs; no exceptions. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 09 9123 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 10 1400 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room and door signs. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines current edition. B. ADA Standards- 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010. C. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2017. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. co 0 D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or N chips. N 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. Q 0 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS w D A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by U) manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sign Manufacturers/Suppliers: 1. Accent Signage Systems, Inc: www.accentsignage.com. 2. ADASigns: www.adasigns.com. 3. American Marking, Inc: www.americanmarkinginc.com. 4. Architectural Graphics, Inc.: www.agisign.com. 5. ASI Sign Systems: www.asisignage.com. 6. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com. 7. Compliancesigns: www.compliancesigns.com. 8. Cosco Industries (ADA signs): www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com/#sle. 9. Cosco Industries (non-ADA signs): www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com/#sle. 10. Indigo Signworks: www.indigosignworks.com. 11. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 12. Latitude Signage and Design: www.latitudesignage.com. 13. Mankato Sign Service. 14. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com. 15. M&M Signs. 16. Schwaab, Inc: www.schwaab.com. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 1400 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 17. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec. 18. Sign Pro. 19. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Doors Signs; Accessibility, Service Rooms, and Other Signs Where Indicated: 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved or applied panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch unless otherwise indicated or required by code. 4. Sign Height: 2 inches unless otherwise indicated or required by code. 5. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on the drawings. a. Service Rooms Shall Include: 1) Mechanical and Electrical Rooms. 6. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "RESTROOM", "MEN", and "WOMEN", room numbers to be determined later, and braille. 7. Other Signs: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those shown on the drawings. a. Other Signs Shall Include: 1) As listed on the drawings. 2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. N 2. Corners: Square. N 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. N B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated or required by code: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. w 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: As selected by Architect from the manufacturers standard colors. p 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. w D 2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA U) Ln A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch. B. Applied Character Panels: Acrylic plastic base, with applied acrylic plastic letters and braille. 1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch. 2. Letter Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Letter Edges: Square. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding metal. B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Protect from damage until Date of Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 1400 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q 0 W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 1400 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 10 2113.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth 2024. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, door swings. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.04 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS co 2.01 MANUFACTURERS o N A. Basis of Design: Scranton Products, Hiny Hiders: www.scrantonproducts.com. N 1. Accurate Partitions Corp (ASI Group): www.accuratepartitions.com. c14 2. All American Metal Corp -AAMCO: www.allamericanmetal.com/#sle. 3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp: www.generalpartitions.com. w 4. Global Steel Products Corp (ASI Group): www.globalpartitions.com. o 5. Hadrian: www.hadrian-inc.com. w 6. Metpar Corp: www.metpar.com/#sle. D 7. Partition Systems International of South Carolina: www.psisc.com/#sle. U) 8. Scranton Products: www.scrantonproducts.com/#sle. 9. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE), tested in accordance with NFPA 286; floor and ceiling anchored. 1. Color: Single color as selected from the manufacturers full range of colors, available color options shall be equivalent to those provided by manufacturer indicated as Basis of Design. B. Doors: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: 24 inch. 3. Width for Ambulatory Use: 32 inch, out-swinging and self-closing. 4. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 5. Height: 55 inch. C. Panels: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Height: 55 inch. D. Pilasters: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2113.19 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Screens: Without doors; to match compartments; mounted to wall with two panel brackets. F. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with continuous satin stainless steel or aluminum angle brackets each side; through bolt with tamper proof type fasteners. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, satin finish, 3 inches high; concealing floor fastenings. B. Wall and Pilaster Brackets: Satin stainless steel or aluminum; continuous type. C. Strikes: Continuous type, aluminum. D. Latches: Aluminum or stainless steel. E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof. 2. Attach all components to solid blocking or structural substrate. F. Hardware: Satin stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. a. Wrap-Around Hinges: 8 inches and fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum. Hinges are through-bolted to pilasters and doors with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. Hinges operate with field adjustable nylon cams. Cams can be field set in 30, 60 or 90 degree increments. 2. Door Latch: Slide type . 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. PART 3 EXECUTION co N 3.01 EXAMINATION N A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION Q 0 A. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level manor, with plastic laid out as shown on shop w drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions. U) B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2113.19 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 10 2123 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended overhead curtain track and guides. B. Surface mounted overhead curtain track and guides. C. Cubicle curtains. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 5100 -Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended ceiling system to support track. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for curtain fabric characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate a reflected ceiling plan view of curtain track, hangers and suspension points, attachment details, schedule of curtain sizes. D. Samples: Submit two fabric samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating fabric color. E. Samples: Submit 12 inch sample length of curtain track including typical splice, wall and ceiling hanger, and escutcheon. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions co requiring special attention. N G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods and materials and stain removal N methods. c14 H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. Q 2. Extra Curtains: One of each type and size. p 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING w D A. Accept curtain materials on site and inspect for damage. U) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cubicle Track and Curtains: 1. Architex: www.architex-Ijh.com. 2. A. R. Nelson Co: www.arnelson.com/#sle. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com/#sle. 4. Imperial Fastener Co., Inc: www.imperialfastener.com/#sle. 5. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 TRACKS AND TRACK COMPONENTS A. Tracks: Extruded aluminum sections; one piece per track run. 1. Profile: Channel. 2. Mounting: Surface. 3. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting vertical test load of 50 lbs without visible deflection of track or damage to supports, safely supporting moving loads, and sufficiently rigid to resist visible deflection and without permanent set. 4. Track End Stop: To fit track section. 5. Track Bends: Minimum 12 inch radius; fabricated without deformation of track section or impeding movement of carriers. 6. Suspension Rods: Tubular aluminum sections, sized to support design loads and designed to receive attachment from track and ceiling support. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2123 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 7. Escutcheons: Where suspension rod meets finished ceiling or structure, provide escutcheons to match rod finish. 8. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: White enamel. 9. Products: a. American Track Supply: www.americantracksupply.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Curtain Carriers: Nylon rollers, size and type compatible with track; designed to eliminate bind when curtain is pulled; fitted to curtain to prevent accidental curtain removal. 1. Provide Two carriers per foot of track length C. Wand: Aluminum, attached to lead carrier, for pull-to-close action. D. Installation Accessories: Types required for specified mounting method and substrate conditions. 2.03 CURTAINS A. Cubicle Curtains: 1. Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Material: Close weave polyester; anti-bacterial, self deodorizing, sanitized, and preshrunk. 3. Color/Pattern: As scheduled on the drawings. B. Open Mesh Cloth: Open weave to permit air circulation; flameproof material, manufacturer's standard color. C. Attachment of Curtain Fabric to Open Mesh Cloth: Manufacturer's standard sewn seam. D. Curtain Fabrication: 1. Width of curtain to be 10 percent wider than track length. co N 2. Length of curtain to end up to 15 inches above finished floor. N 3. Include open mesh cloth at top 10 to 24 inches of curtain for room air circulation, attached N to curtain as specified above. N 4. Seams and Hems: Manufacturer's standard fabrication method for securely sewn and finished seams and hems. w PART 3 EXECUTION Q 0 3.01 EXAMINATION w D A. Verify that surfaces and supports above ceiling are ready to receive work of this Section. U) B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install curtain track to be secure, rigid, and true to ceiling line. B. Secure track to ceiling system. C. Install end cap and stop device. D. Install curtains on carriers ensuring smooth operation. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2123 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories. B. Commercial shower and bath accessories. C. Diaper changing stations. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium 2017 (Reapproved 2022). B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass 2021. C. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror 2018. D. ASTM F2285- Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use 2022. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. co PART 2 PRODUCTS o N 2.01 MANUFACTURERS N A. Basis of Design: Products listed are made by Bobrick: www.bobrick.com. B. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories: w 1. AJW Architectural Products: www.ajw.com. Q 2. ASI -American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. o 3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. D 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc: www.bobrick.com. U) 5. Gamco USA: www.gamcousa.com. — 6. Basco Incorporated: www.bascoinc.com. 7. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, polished finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Provided by Owner and Installed by Contractor: 1. Toilet Paper Dispenser. B. Provided with Fiberglass Shower Units within the Units, refer to Mechanical/Plumbing Documents: 1. Shower Seat. 2. Soap Tray/Holder. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2800 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3. Grab Bars. C. Waste Receptacle: Recessed, stainless steel, seamless lower door for access to container, with tumbler lock, reinforced panel full height of door, continuously welded bottom pan and seamless exposed flanges. 1. Products: a. Bradley; Elvari Receptacles; 12 gallon capacity: www.bradleycorp.com. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036. 1. Size: 24 by 36 inches. 2. Frame: 0.05 inchangle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; satin finish. 3. Products (Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.): a. B-290 2436 manufactured by Bobrick(welded-frame mirror). b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface. 1. Standard Duty Grab Bars: a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1 1/2 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, concealed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. d. Products: 1) B-6806 Series manufactured by Bobrick. 2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, self-closing door, locking panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle. co 1. Products: N a. B-254 manufactured by Bobrick. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. N 2.05 COMMERCIAL SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIES Lu A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, 0.05 inch wall Q thickness, satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished p stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners. w 1. Products: U) a. B-6047 manufactured by Bobrick. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment, flameproof and stain-resistant. 2. Size: 42 and 70 inches, hemmed edges. 3. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 6 inch centers. 4. Color: White. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap closure. 6. Products: a. B-204 manufactured by Bobrick. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Products: a. B-76717 manufactured by Bobrick. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 DIAPER CHANGING STATIONS A. Diaper Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial toilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285. 1. Basis of Design: Koala Kare Products; Product KB310-SSWM and RE. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2800 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Material: Stainless steel. 3. Mounting: Surface and Recessed. 4. Minimum Rated Load: 300 pounds. 5. Manufacturers: a. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. b. AJW Architectural Products[<>]: www.ajw.com. c. Diaper Deck& Company: www.diaperdeck.com. d. Koala Kare Products: www.koalabear.com. e. Safe-Strap Company, Inc: www.diaperdepot.com. f. Substitutions: 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.07 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Door Mounted Coat Hook: 1. Product: B-6717 manufactured by Bobrick. 2. Location: Provide one hook at single use restroom doors. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on drawings. co N B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. o N C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations. w END OF SECTION o Lu D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 2800 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. 1. Type A:B:C - Dry Chemical. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide Current Edition. B. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers 2022. C. UL (DIR)-Online Certifications Directory Current Edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, extinguisher ratings and classifications, color and finish, anchorage details, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS co N A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher N ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS w A. Fire Extinguishers: o 1. Ansul, a Tyco Business; Sentry Extinguishers: www.ansul.com. w 2. Activar Construction Products Group; JL Industries Cosmic Extinguishers: D www.activarcpg.com. cn 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Extinguishers: www.larsensmfg.com. 4. Potter-Roemer; Product 3000 Series Extinguishers: www.potterroemer.com. 5. Nystrom.com; Product ABC Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers: www.nystrom.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. Activar Construction Products Group - JL Industries; Ambassador Series Cabinets: www.activarcpg.com/#sle. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Architectural Series Cabinets: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer; Alta Series Cabinets: www.potterroemer.com. 4. Nystrom; Product Alpine Series Extinguishers: www.nystrom.com. 5. Strike First Corporation of America; EL-Elite Architectural Series Fire Extinguisher Cabinet, Non-Fire Rated: www.strikefirstusa.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers- General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) or FM (AG)for purpose specified and as indicated. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge. 1. Class: A:B:C type. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 4400 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Sizes by Location Type: a. For office type areas; 4A:80BC: 10 pound; travel 75 foot max. 3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat red color. 4. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Cold rolled steel with powder-coat finish. B. Cabinet Configuration: Reuse existing fully-recessed cabinate; only where required by existing construction provide and install new semi-recessed type in lieu of reusing existing cabinet. 1. Size to accommodate accessories. 2. Projected Trim: Returned to wall surface, with approximately 2 1/2 to 4 1/2 inch projection, and rolled edge 2 inch wide face. 3. Provide cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams, and with formed perimeter trim and door stiles. C. Door: 0.036 inch metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon catch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. D. Door Elevation: "Vertical-Duo Panel"A tall, narrow window offset to the handle side. E. Door Glazing: Acrylic plastic, clear, 1/8 inch thick, flat shape and set in resilient channel glazing gasket. F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of anchors. G. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. H. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected. I. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel. co N 2.04 ACCESSORIES N A. Extinguisher Bracket and Strap: Steel, with powder-coat paint, sized to fit extinguisher; finish to match extinguisher. J-Hooks are not acceptable, no exceptions. B. Cabinet Signage: Fire Extinguisher. w C. Non-Cabinet Signage: Fire Extinguisher, 3-way; size and mounting in accordance with Q applicable codes. o LU PART 3 EXECUTION D U) 3.01 EXAMINATION L A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 24 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet or as shown on the drawings. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 4400 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 10 5113 METAL LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lockers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code. D. Samples: Submit two samples 3 by 6 inches in size showing color and finish of metal locker material. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS N 0 A. Basis of Design: Vanguard Knocked Down Metal Storage Lockers by Penco. �" 1. Provide standard options, metal gages, and as noted herein. N 2. Lockers provided by other approved manufacturers shall be equivalent to Basis of Design. 3. Note: It is understood that metal gauges may vary by manufacturer based on each locker w series design, however other manufacturer's standard gauges for proposed lockers series Q shall not be decreased from their currently printed literature. p B. Metal Lockers: w 1. Art Metal Products: www.artmetalproducts.com/#sle. U) 2. ASI Lockers: www.asistorage.com. — 3. DeBourgh Mfg. Co.; Worley Lockers. 4. Elite Storage Products: www.elitestorageproducts.com. 5. General Storage Systems, Div. of North American Steel; Decor Tri-Lok. 6. Hallowell: www.hallowell-list.com. 7. Hadrain Inc.: www.hadrian-inc.com. 8. List Industries, Inc: www.listindustries.com/#sle. 9. Lyon Workspace Products: www.lyonworkspace.com/#sle. 10. Olympus Lockers & Storage Products, Inc.: www.olympuslockers.com. 11. Penco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com/#sle. 12. Pinnacle Storage Products: www.pinnaclestorageproducts.com. 13. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com/#sle. 14. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS A. Lockers: Metal lockers, wall mounted with matching closed base. 1. Size: As shown on the drawings. 2. Configuration: As shown on the drawings. 3. Fittings: Size and configuration as indicated on drawings. a. Hat shelf. b. Hooks: One double prong. 4. Ventilation: Louvers at top and bottom of door panel. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 5113 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 5. Locking: Classic III Multi-point latching with recessed handles, include master keyed combination locks. 6. Provide sloped top. 2.03 METAL LOCKERS A. Note: It is understood that metal gauges may vary by manufacturer based on each locker series design, however a manufacturer's standard gauges shall not be decreased from their currently printed literature. Body, frame, doors, trim, tops, bases, shall be equivalent to basis of design. B. Lockers: Factory assembled, made of formed sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; metal edges finished smooth without burrs; baked enamel finished inside and out. 1. Where ends or sides are exposed, provide flush panel closures. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect. C. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge with powder coat finish to match locker color. D. Coat Hooks: Stainless steel or zinc-plated steel. E. Number Plates: Provide oval or rectangular shaped aluminum plates as selected by the Owner. F. Locks: Locking device supplied by Owner. G. Provide ADA units where shown; if not shown, locate where directed by the Architect. ADA locker units shall include all options and accessories to meet ADA requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place and secure lockers. co C. Install lockers plumb and square. o D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 CIA pounds. N N E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. F. Install end panels, filler panels, sloped tops, and miscellaneous panels. Q G. Install fittings if not factory installed. o Lu H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. D 3.02 CLEANING Ln A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 5113 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 10 5617 WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel shelf standards, brackets, and accessories. B. Shelves. C. Refer to drawings for locations and configurations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls for attachment of standards. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Blocking in metal stud walls for attachment of standards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. N 0 PART 2 PRODUCTS N 2.01 MANUFACTURERS N A. Steel Shelf Standards and Brackets: 1. Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company; 87 TM/187TM Series: Lu www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle. o 2. Schulte: www.schultestorage.com. w 3. ClosetMaid: www.closetmaid.com. D 4. Rubbermaid: www.rubbermaid.com. cn 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Steel Shelf Standards, Brackets, and Accessories: 1. Super-Duty Shelf Standards and Brackets: Single-slotted channel standards for brackets adjustable in 1 inch increments along entire length of standard, drilled and countersunk for screws. a. Acceptable Product: KV 87/187. b. Load Capacity: Recommended by manufacturer for loading of 540 to 1,060 pounds per pair of standards. c. Face Width: 5/8 inch, single slotted. d. Material: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch sheet steel. e. Lengths: As indicated on drawings. f. Finish: Powder-coated, white; provide screws with matching heads. g. Brackets: 12 gage, 0.1046 inch sheet steel, reinforced, locking into slots with molded nylon cam lock lever; size to suit shelves; same finish as standards. h. Application: Use extra heavy duty standards at all locations. i. Bracket Quantity: Provide one bracket for each 12 inches of standard length. B. Shelving: 1. Laminate Faced Shelves: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard covered with high pressure decorative laminate on both sides. a. Edge Finish: 3mm edge. Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 5617 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation b. Substrate Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal. c. Length: As indicated on drawings. d. Laminate: NEMA LD 3 Type HGL. e. Laminate Color and Pattern: White. f. Application: Use laminate faced shelves at all locations. C. Fasteners: Screws as recommended by manufacturer for intended application or as otherwise required by project conditions. Finish of exposed to view fasteners to match finish of standards and other components. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount standards to solid backing capable of supporting intended loads. C. Install brackets, shelving, and accessories. D. Provide double sided foam tape between adjoining sections of aluminum shelving to maintain co alignment where applicable. o N 3.04 PROTECTION N A. Protect installed products until completion of project. N B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. w END OF SECTION ~ Q 0 w D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 10 5617 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 12 3600 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 064100 -Architectural Wood Casework. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. 1. Indicate layout of countertop supports brackets at all locations. Include attachment details to walls and counters. Final bracket layout shall be subject to Architect approval. 2. For bracket layout unsupported spans of countertops shall not exceed 48 inches. Wall hung or cantilever spans shall resist a 50 lbs per square foot load and not deflect in excess of 1/4 inch in any span or portion thereof. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. N 0 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE N A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this N section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING w A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. o B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, D in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. U) 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOPS A. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin self-supporting over structural members or over continuous substrate as detailed. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 2 cm, minimum. 2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA 3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Manufacturers: 1) Cambria Company LLC: www.cambriausa.com/#sle. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. b. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 3. Other Components Thickness: 2 cm, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 4 cm thick unless indicated otherwise; 5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top unless indicated otherwise; minimum 4 inches high. Project No. 23-29513 Section 12 3600 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.02 MATERIALS A. Counter Support Brackets: 1. Counter support brackets unless noted otherwise shall be 1/8" steel, reversible brackets as manufactured by A&M Hardware, Inc., 2705 Mt. Joy Rd, Manheim, PA 17545. 888-647-0200, Fax 717-664-4582. www.aandmhardware.com. 2. Sizes shall be selected from the manufacturer's standards: a. 24"x29" (Paint/Primer Finish Only) b. 24"x24" (Paint/Primer Finish Only) c. 18"x24" (Available in S.S.) d. 15"x21" (Available in S.S.) e. 12"x18" (Paint/Primer Finish Only) f. 8"x12" (Available in S.S.) g. 5"x8" (Paint/Primer Finish Only) 3. Brackets finish shall be standard texture powder coat in black, white, gray or almond. a. To be selected by Architect. 4. Provide 8" Black Oak Park Bracket by Knape &Vogt Mfg Co Model 200OP BLK 8 at all locations indicted on the drawings. 5. Support counters at each end and in the center at a minimum; counter fabricated to determine final bracket quantity, spacing, and locations. 6. Other equivalent brackets are acceptable. B. Concealed Counter Support Brackets: 1. Counter Support Brackets: Provide Concealed Brackets by A&M Hardware, Inc., 2705 Mt. Joy Rd, Manheim, PA 17545. 888-647-0200, Fax 717-664-4582: www.aandmhardware.com or equivalent. 2. Federal Brace: www.federalbrace.com or equivalent. co 3. Bracket Length: Provide maximum allowed length at each location; brackets shall include o upper extension at all location where wall extends above counter. N 4. Bracket finish shall be standard texture powder coat in black, white, gray or almond. N 5. Attachment Hardware: Manufacturers standard. "' 6. Other equivalent brackets are acceptable. w C. Counter Support Brackets with Skirt/Apron Support: Q 1. ADA Vanity Bracket by A&M Hardware, Inc, or equivalent. o 2. Stone Pro ADA Compliant Countertop Support#3743 by Braxton-Bragg, Rakks EHV- D Vanity Supports, or equivalent. U) 3. Federal Brace: www.federalbrace.com or equivalent. a. Other equivalent brackets are acceptable. 4. Fasteners: Provide Flat head 1/4" -20 thread with 4 mm hex drive connector bolts in chrome, black, or oil rubbed bronze. Color as selected by Architect. D. Counter Support Brackets; Flat Brackets: 1. Centerline Brackets: Countertop Island Support Brackets. 2. Speed Brace Stealth & Stealth HD; and Panel Clips. E. Steel Support Posts: Manufacturer's standard with factory finish and flush fasteners at base flange. Color and sheen as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of factory applied finishes. F. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. G. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. Project No. 23-29513 Section 12 3600 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach wood countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch. C. Seal the exposed front underside edge of plastic laminate countertops with clear solvent based co polyurethane at all locations; or wrap with plastic laminate back to face of casework below. o D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 TOLERANCES N A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum. Lu B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum. Q C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum. 0 LU 3.05 CLEANING D U) A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. Ln 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 12 3600 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 22 0010 BASIC MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical Plumbing Requirements specifically applicable to Division 22 in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Mechanical Plumbing Contract shall also include furnishing and installing a complete plumbing system for the building and all other related work as called for under the specifications and shown on plans. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The Mechanical Plumbing Contract shall include all work under the listed Division 22 of the Specifications Index and all related Mechanical work as shown on the Drawings for the project. B. A Complete table of Mechanical Reference Symbols is shown on the plans. C. Under this Contract the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a PDF of all pertinent systems related documents stored on a soild state external hard drive or a single flash stick. Submit a single PDF to the Engineer for review. The Engineer will then turn information provided over to the Owner. The PDF shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Test and Balance Reports. co 6. The Mechanical installation to be made under Division 23 is set up for contract bidding as o follows: N a. Mechanical HVAC Contractor is a sub-contractor to the General Contractor. c 1) The Mechanical contractor is responsible for furnishing equipment, such as cranes, lifts, etc. in order to provide a complete installation of mechanical Lu systems. 2) The Mechanical contractor shall be a sub-contractor to the General Contractor o and shall include in the bid, prices from sub-contractors for control wiring, and w other trades necessary to complete the entire job. D U) D. Under this Contract the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two 3-ring binders L and a PDF of all pertinent systems' related documents stored on a soild state external hard drive or a single flash drive. Submit a single, organized PDF to the Engineer for review. After review is complete, contractor shall turn information provided over to the Owner. The binders and PDF shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Test and Balance Reports. E. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for contacting the utility companies and coordinating the water, sewer, storm and natural gas connections for the building service. Include all costs in bid. F. The Mechanical installation to be made under Divisions 22 is set up for contract bidding as follows: 1. Mechanical Plumbing Contractor is a sub-contractor to the General Contractor. a. The Mechanical contractor is responsible for furnishing equipment, such as cranes, lifts, etc. in order to provide a complete installation of mechanical systems. b. The Mechanical contractor shall be a sub-contractor to the General Contractor and shall include in the bid, prices from sub-contractors for control wiring, and other trades necessary to complete the entire job. 1.04 SPECIFICATIONS COMPLIANCE Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0010 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. The requirements of these specifications shall be complied with in every respect. Therefore, it shall be absolutely mandatory that the job foreman, all lead mechanics, subcontractors and their foreman have completely studied these specifications, be completely knowledgeable as to their entire contents, and maintain a copy at the job-site. Failure to comply with this requirement will be reason to presume the mechanic or subcontractor is not in responsible charge of their work due to ignorance of job requirements, and will be reason for the owner to require dismissal and replacement with approved personnel. Every foreman and lead mechanic shall be provided with a complete copy of this specification. 1.05 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation without change in the contract sum. 1.06 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. The following work is not included as part of the Contract. 1. The removal and storage of any equipment in the building required to be moved or relocated during the construction process. 1.07 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS A. The Plumbing Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. B. All permits necessary for a complete plumbing installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. C. This contractor shall contact the local utilities for gas, water, sanitary and storm sewers, and include in their bid the any costs associated with service installation charges of the utility(s). D. Except in those municipalities which provide state approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical equipment wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of Electricity. Allowance N shall be made in the bid and contract for the cost of such inspection. N 1. Fees for such inspection will be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of N the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be provided by the c14 Contractor with the Request for Payment. Lu 1.08 REFERENCES Q A. All equipment, piping, etc., shall be new and shall be installed to meet the approval of the o following additional ordinances: ASME Rules for Pressure Tanks, National Board of Fire w Underwriter's Rules, American Waterworks and the American Gas Association. U) U) 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 3000. B. Products Scheduled on the Drawings by Naming one Manufacturer, but not Indicating Other Approved Manufactures in the Specifications: Use any equivalent product complying with the specifications in general and equivalent to the"Basis of Design" identified in the drawing's schedules. Pre-bid substitutions are not required in this situation. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. D. All documents shall be submitted in .pdf format unless pre-approved by Engineer. E. The contractor shall not use any equipment or materials that does not have the engineer's stamped approval. F. Shop drawing shall identify the product/equipment uint that is being provided. Generic shop drawings not indicating specific product/equipment will be rejected. G. Shop drawing shall indicated dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. 1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1.12 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0010 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. This Contractor shall coordinate their work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. E. The Contractor shall consider and review the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as a complete set. They will be responsible for any and all mechanical work shown or stated (to be by the contractor), to include this work in the bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Mechanical section of the plans and specifications. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for continual coordination of the mechanical work with other trades so as to avoid conflicts in installation. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades to assure that construction proceeds in an orderly and timely manner. B. Study the civil, structural, electrical, shop and any specialty drawings and specifications to determine required coordination. 1. Anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports that may be required for the mechanical work co shall be furnished and installed under the same division of the specifications as the o respective items to be supported. Excluded from this requirement are cast in place anchor N bolts. 2. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors and walls as specified will be N provided by the various trades in their respective materials, but the trade requiring them LU shall see that they are properly located in zones provided or otherwise approved by the Engineer or Architect and/or Owner. o 3. Locations of pipes, panels, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate w interferences encountered. The Project Coordinator shall determine the exact rerouting D and location of each pipe and/or duct encountered prior to fabrication. U) a. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. 4. Installation of Arrangement: The contractor shall install all mechanical work to permit removal of, and access to, (without damage to other parts) all parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. C. Contractor to expose and verify location and elevation of existing sewer prior to laying any pipe to or from connection points when connecting to existing or proposed sewer. If location or elevation of existing sewer does not match location and elevation indicated on drawings, notify engineer immediately, at which time the engineer may adjust proposed alignments and elevations. Allow reasonable amount of time for engineer to make assessment of conditions and determine alternate means of construction if necessary. As a minimum, engineer shall be allowed one working day from the time of notification to make assessment and determination of alternate work without submittal of Change Proposal for adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Times. D. Layout Priority: 1. All trades shall understand that other trades will need to work in the same areas during the project. All final decisions as to the right-of-way and runs of utility lines (pipes, ducts, etc.) shall be made by Owner and/or Architect. In general, priority shall be given as follows: Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0010 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation a. Process/Fire Protection piping which must be drainable b. Sheet metal ductwork c. Light Fixtures d. Plumbing sanitary, storm, and vent lines e. Sprinkler piping f. Gravity water lines g. Hydronic or steam lines h. Refrigerant lines i. Gas and air lines j. Plumbing water k. Electrical conduit I. Control air lines E. PREPARE DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS WHERE NECESSARY TO ASSURE PROPER FIT AND NECESSARY CLEARANCE. 1.14 CUTTING, PATCHING AND FIRESTOPPING A. The Plumbing Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for their Work. B. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by the Plumbing Contractor. C. All patching shall be done by Plumbing Contractor. D. All cutting of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons, or their normal concealing construction, if such unsightly conditions occur, Plumbing Contractor will be required, at their own expense, to replace the damaged construction. E. This Plumbing Contractor shall provide and install firestopping materials per Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. ce) N 1.15 ACCESS PANELS REQUIRED BY TRADE N A. Trade requiring access shall provide and install access panels where not shown or specified. N B. The finished appearance and function will be subject to approval by the Architect/Owner. cV C. Provide panels that accommodate adjacent finishes in finished spaces. D. Access panels shall meet all code requirements for each location they are installed and shall be o sized appropriately. w 1.16 ELECTRICAL U) A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish all motor starters and motor controls and provide all wiring for motor control operation, except if specified otherwise. 1.17 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COSTS A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment for specified units, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical installation costs for this substitution whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the specification or was approved equal after the project was in the bidding process. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from date of final substantial completion. 1.19 PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS A. If a specification section does not include a list of approved manufacturers, that section is open to all manufacturers who meet the section's specified requirements. Substitution requests are not required for any manufacturers. B. If a specification section does include a list of manufacturers, that list is all pre-approved manufacturers for that section. Substitution requests will be required for any alternative manufacturers. PART 2 PRODUCTS Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0010 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.01 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NOT USED END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q 0 W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0010 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 22 0050 SELECTIVE PLUMBING DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The Front End Sections, General Requirements, Special Requirements, Division 1 and other applicable specifications included in the project manual form a part of the Plumbing specification and shall have the same force as if it was printed in this section. B. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular, such reference shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the installation. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plumbing demolition. B. Removal of existing piping and equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Regulatory Agencies and Code requirements. B. Reference Standards - Comply with the following: 1. Safety Requirements for Demolition -ANSI A 10.6. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations - NFPA 241. 3. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 4. The Federal Register- Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants -40 CFR-81. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 0010 Basic Mechanical Plumbing Requirements. co PART 2 PRODUCTS N 2.01 MATERIALS N A. Materials used for patching and finishing shall be of the same quality and texture as the adjacent undisturbed areas. Refer to 22 0010 Basic Mechanical Plumbing Requirements for w additional information regarding cutting, patching and finishing. Q B. Use fireproof materials according to 22 0010 Basic Mechanical Plumbing Requirements and o Division 7 for patching fire resistive construction. w D PART 3 EXECUTION U) 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide alteration and demolition of plumbing systems as required by the drawings and specifications. B. Contractor shall remove all abandoned piping, hangers, equipment, and support within project limits, whether shown on drawings or not. Existing piping rendered abandoned after demolition of equipment shall be removed. C. Do not begin work until time schedules and manner of operations have been approved by the Owner's Representative. All interruptions of existing services shall be included in the Owner approved schedules, and so identified. Demolition shall follow the Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical phasing plans. D. Verify the location of all related existing equipment, piping and other plumbing systems. Provide for the removal, relocation, rerouting, and reconnecting of this work as required due to demolition methods or sequences employed. Obtain the Owner's permission prior to commencing any work. E. Comply with the installation procedures specified in the applicable specification sections in Division 22. F. Remove all support items associated with demolished equipment unless noted otherwise. G. Where existing equipment must remain in service during construction, provide rerouting and reconnecting of plumbing services as required to maintain continuous service. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0050 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation H. Maintain system continuity and operation of piping circuits, whether spliced, extended, relocated or newly constructed. Provide temporary piping and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. I. All piping hangers, supports, anchors, etc., shall be removed along with all piping shown to be removed. J. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. K. Existing Plumbing System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Obtain permission from Owner and Engineer at least one week before partially or completely disabling existing system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. L. Contractor shall pay for all fees for disposal of equipment. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that abandoned or removed apparatus and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. B. Demolition Drawings are based on non-destructive field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect and Engineer before disturbing existing installation. C. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING PLUMBING SYSTEMS A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply. C. Disconnect and remove existing apparatus and equipment where noted. co D. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing plumbing o installations, or as specified. 3.04 PIPING N N r A. All welded piping shall be cut off square at the locations indicated on the demolition drawings. All openings of any remaining valves, piping or fittings shall be closed off with weld caps or Lu blind flanges to prevent debris from entering the existing systems. o B. All threaded piping shall be disconnected at the location indicated on the demolition drawings. w All openings of remaining valves, piping, fittings and equipment shall be closed off with pipe U) plugs or pipe caps as required to prevent debris from entering the existing systems. C. All pipe hangers, supports, and/or anchors shall be removed along with all piping shown to be removed. 3.05 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be removed from all piping, fittings, valves and equipment designated for demolition. B. Comply with all safety precautions related to insulation removal. 3.06 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. 3.07 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment where indicated and/or required. All such material removed shall not be reused in the new construction work unless specifically noted or approved. B. The Owner shall have the first right of salvage of all removed equipment and materials. The contractor shall coordinate with the Owner which equipment and materials will be retained by the Owner and which are to be disposed. The disposed materials shall become the property of the Contractor who shall remove the unused equipment and materials from the site and dispose of properly. Refer to the "Special Conditions" included in the specifications for additional information. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0050 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation C. The contractor shall remove all equipment and materials that are being retained by the Owner with care and transported to a location within the project site determined by the Owner. The contractor shall be liable for damage to existing salvaged equipment during removal and transporting. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0050 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe markers. D. Ceiling tacks. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 2023. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Schedules: 1. Submit plumbing component identification schedule listing equipment, piping, and valves. 2. Detail proposed component identification data in terms of of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding to be applied to corresponding product. 3. Valve Data Format: Include id-number, location, function, and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION GUIDELINE co N A. Tags: N 1. Piping: 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. N 2. Manual operated and automated control valves. 3. Ceiling tacks placed on lay-in ceiling surface to reference plumbing components. Lu B. Pipe Markers: 3/4 inch diameter and higher. 2.02 TAGS o A. Metal: Brass, 19 gauge 1-1/2 inch in diameter with smooth edges, engraved, smooth edges, D and corrosion-resistant chain. Up to three lines of text. U) B. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten 12-point letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.03 PIPE MARKERS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Flexible Marker: Factory fabricated, semi-rigid, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid conveyed. C. Flexible Tape Marker: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Identification Scheme, ASME A13.1: 1. Primary: External Pipe Diameter, Uninsulated or Insulated. a. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inches: Use 8 inch field-length with 1/2 inch text height. b. 1-1/2 to 2 inches: Use 8 inch field-length with 3/4 inch text height. c. 2-1/2 to 6 inches: Use 12 inch field-length with 1-1/4 inch text height. 2. Secondary: Color scheme per fluid service. a. Water; Potable, Storm, Sanitary, Vent, Boiler Feed, and Other: White text on green background. 3. Tertiary: Other Details. a. Directional flow arrow. 2.04 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. B. Color code as follows: Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0553 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Plumbing Valves: Green. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive identification products. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install flexible nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags in clear view and align with axis of piping C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install plastic tape pipe marker around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Apply ASME A13.1 Pipe Marking Rules: 1. Place pipe marker adjacent to changes in direction. 2. Place pipe marker adjacent each valve port and flange end. 3. Place pipe marker at both sides of floor and wall penetrations. 4. Place pipe marker every 25 to 50 feet interval of straight run. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Equipment Type: 1. Tags: a. Plumbing valves 2. Piping Markers: a. Domestic Water Piping Systems END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0553 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cellular glass insulation. B. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. C. Glass fiber insulation. D. Jacketing and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus 2019, with Editorial Revision (2023). B. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation 2017 (Reapproved 2023). C. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form 2023. D. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation 2022a. E. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation 2022. F. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel 2008 (Reapproved 2023). G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. co N H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor N Transmission Rate of Materials 2022a, with Editorial Revision (2023). I. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Current `V Edition, Including All Revisions. w 1.03 SUBMITTALS Q 0 A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. w B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and U) thickness for each service, and locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and sunlight, construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER INSULATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0719 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com/#sle. 2. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com/#sle. 3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. K Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. K Value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm. E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. 2.03 CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C552, Type II, Grade 6. 1. K Value: 0.35 at 100 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature Range: From 250 degrees F to 800 degrees F. N 3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch maximum per inch. N 4. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum. 2.04 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturers: w 1. Aeroflex USA, Inc: www.aeroflexusa.com/#sle. ~ Q 2. Armacell LLC: www.armacell.us/#sle. 0 3. K-Flex USA LLC: www.kflexusa.com/#sle. D 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. U) B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. D. Weather Barrier: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation and ASTM E84 compliant. 2.05 JACKETING AND ACCESSORIES A. PVC Plastic Jacket: 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil, 0.010 inch. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0719 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. E. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Manufacturer Fabricated Fittings: Pre-fabricated insulation elbows, tees, and fabricated covers for grooved fittings and couplings to reduce complex cutting and assembly of insulation in the field. Provides complete system integrity for thermal performance and controlling condensation drip from below-ambient systems when used as part of a pipe insulation system. UL GREENGUARD Gold Certified for low VOC's and includes antimicrobial protection from the growth of mold and mildew in the system. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure-sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. o H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. N 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. w 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. o 5. Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe supports: Pipe supports with a load-bearing PET core to w support and protect the insulation from crushing or damage while maintaining the thermal U) integrity of the system and preventing thermal bridging. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation is located on the outer part of the support for connection to adjacent insulation. Matches all wall thickness and internal diameter dimensions of insulation. I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, see Section 07 8400. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 0-1 1/4 inch. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Pipe Size Range: 1 1/2 inch & Up. 4) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch. b. Cellular Glass Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 0-1 1/4 inch. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Pipe Size Range: 1 1/2 inch & Up. 4) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch. 2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0719 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3) Fittings: PVC fitting covers. b. Cellular Glass Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 0-1 1/4 inch. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Pipe Size Range: 1 1/2 inch & Up. 4) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch. 5) Fittings: PVC fitting covers 3. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Fittings: PVC fitting covers b. Cellular Glass Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Fittings: PVC fitting covers c. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: 1) Inside pipe chases only 2) Pipe Size Range: All inch. 3) Thickness: 1 inch. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) L Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 0719 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 22 1005 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary waste piping, above grade. B. Domestic water piping, above grade. C. Pipe flanges, unions, and couplings. D. Pipe hangers and supports. E. Ball valves. F. Thermostatic balancing valves. G. Strainers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 2021. B. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings 2021. C. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: DWV 2021. D. ASME B16.29 -Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings—DWV 2022. E. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping 2020. F. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal 2020. G. ASTM B88- Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube 2022. co H. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric)2020. "' 0 N I. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) 2020. N J. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube 2016. K. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Q Alloy Tube and Fittings 2016. p L. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) D Plastic Piping Systems 2020. U) M. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings 2020. N. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer and Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets 2020. O. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. P. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems 2023a. Q. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains 2014, with Addendum (2020). R. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications 2021. S. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications 2020. T. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation 2018, with Amendment(2019). U. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends 2010, with Errata . V. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects 2022, with Errata. W. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components- Lead Content 2022. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1005 - Page 1 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation X. NSF/ANSI 61 - Drinking Water System Components— Health Effects 2022. Y. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)and be listed by NSF international. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems and valves from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. co PART 2 PRODUCTS o N 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS N A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux(if used), that "' comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. w B. Plenum-Installed Piping: Flame-spread index equal or below 25 and smoke-spread index equal or below 50 according to ASTM E84 or UL 723 tests. o 2.02 SANITARY WASTE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE D U) A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. U) 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.23, sovent. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 3. Not Allowed in Return Air Plenums. 2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double-pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified, utilizing EPDM, nontoxic, synthetic rubber sealing elements. 2.04 PIPE FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 inch and Under: 1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Sizes Over 1 inch: Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1005 - Page 2 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. B. Conform to ASME B31.9. C. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. D. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. E. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. F. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment. G. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inch: Cast iron hook. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inch and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. o H. Plumbing Piping -Water: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. N 2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. w 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger Q rods. o 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes Up to 3 inch: Cast iron hook. w D 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inch and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel U) clamp. — 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 inch: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.06 PIPE SLEEVES A. Vertical Piping: 1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor. 2. Provide sealant for watertight joint. 3. Blocked Out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle set in silicon adhesive around opening. 4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration. B. Sheet Metal: Pipe passing through interior walls, partitions, and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are specified below. C. Clearances: 1. Provide allowance for insulated piping. 2. Wall, Floor, Partitions, and Beam Flanges: 1 inch greater than external pipe diameter. 3. All Rated Openings: Caulked tight with fire stopping material complying with ASTM E814 in accordance with Section 07 8400 to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1005 - Page 3 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.07 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Anvil International: www.anvilintl.com/#sle. 2. Apollo Valves: www.apollovalves.com/#sle. 3. Grinnell Products: www.grinnell.com/#sle. 4. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com/#sle. 5. Uponor, Inc: www.uponorengineering.com/#sle. 6. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Construction, 4 inch and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze body, 304 stainless steel ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded or grooved ends with union. 2.08 THERMOSTATIC BALANCING VALVE A. Manufacturers: 1. Circuit Solver: https://circuitsolver.com/. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Construction: NSF/ANSI 61 lead free, stainless steel body, wax thermostatic element, maximum 200 psig, maximum 250 degree F. C. Operation: Fixed, non-adjustable (tamper proof)temperature setpoint ranging from 80 degrees F (27 degrees C)to 170 degrees F (27 degrees C) in 5 degrees F (2.8 degrees C) increments. 1. The valve shall have a temperature accuracy of±3.0 degrees F (±1.7 degrees C). D. Accessories: 1. Integrated union. 2. Shutoff valves `o N O 2.09 STRAINERS N A. Manufacturers: N 1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com/#sle. 2. Green Country Filter Manufacturing: www.greencountryfilter.com/#sle. w 3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com/#sle. ~ Q 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 0 Lu B. Size 2 inch and Smaller: D 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated U) screen. 2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1005 - Page 4 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. See Section 22 0516. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. 1. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08 3100. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc-rich primer to welding. J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. 1. All metals that are not resistant to corrosion shall be painted. K. This contractor shall be responsible for removing all spoils from excavation and trenching from the site. L. All trenches above the pea-rock shall be backfilled with select granular fill up to the sand base. Select granular fill shall have a maximum aggregate size of 2", with a maximum of 10% on a 200 sieve. Trenches shall be compacted to 98% proctor density. General Contractor shall finish final grade. M. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. N. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. O. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. P. Inserts: coN 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. N 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of N reinforced concrete beams. C14 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. w 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. Q 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt w with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. D U) Q. Pipe Hangers and Supports: U) 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. 6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 7. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 8. Support piping at every joint. R. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. S. Install thermostatic balancing valve in each domestic hot water return piping branch beyond last hot water device in that branch as shown on plans. 1. Provide suitable access panel as required in non-accessible ceilings and walls. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1005 - Page 5 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.06 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Verify and inspect systems according to requirements by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. In the absence of specific test and inspection procedures proceed as indicated below. B. Domestic Water Systems: 1. Perform hydrostatic testing for leakage prior to system disinfection. 2. Test Preparation: Close each fixture valve or disconnect and cap each connected fixture. 3. General: a. Fill the system with water and raise static head to 10 psi above service pressure. Minimum static head of 50 to 150 psi. As an exception, certain codes allow a maximum static pressure of 80 psi. C. Gas Distribution Systems: 1. Test Preparation: Close each appliance valve or disconnect and cap each connected appliance. 2. General Systems: a. Inject a minimum of 10 psi of compressed air into the piping system for a duration of co 15 minutes and verify with a gauge that no perceptible pressure drop is measured. o b. Ensure test pressure gauge has a range of twice the specific pressure rate selected with an accuracy of 1/10 of 1 pound. N N D. Test Results: Document and certify successful results, otherwise repair, document, and retest. 3.07 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM w A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 0110.58. p B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed, and clean. D C. Ensure acidity (pH)of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda U) or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1005 - Page 6 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 22 1006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Hose bibbs. D. Hydrants. E. Refrigerator valve and recessed box. F. Water hammer arrestors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A112.6.3- Floor Drains 2022. B. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects 2022, with Errata. C. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components- Lead Content 2022. D. PDI-WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters 2017. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. co D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. o 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for additional provisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE N A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. Lu 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING p A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. D PART 2 PRODUCTS U) 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content. 2.02 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com/#sle. 2. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle. 3. Wade: https://www.wadedrains.com 4. Watts Regulator Company: www.watts.com 5. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Floor Drain: 1. ASME Al 12.6.3; lacquered cast iron or stainless steel, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and square, adjustable nickel bronze strainer . 2.03 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com/#sle. 2. Josam Company: www.josam.com/#sle. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1006 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 4. Wade: https://www.wadedrains.com 5. Watts Regulator Company: www.watts.com 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 2. PVC cleanout that fits flush inside Schedule 40 DWV PVC pipe with brass threaded insert. Provide with stainless steel round access cover. D. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. 2.04 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com/#sle. 2. Watts Regulator Company, a part of Watts Water Technologies: www.wattsregulator.com/#sle. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. 4. Sioux Chief: www.siouxchief.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: 1. Copper construction, piston type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi working pressure. o PART 3 EXECUTION N 3.01 INSTALLATION N A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. w B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage o system. LU C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. U) Ln D. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatory sinks or before final fixture connection in restroom group. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 1006 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush valve water closets. B. Wall hung urinals. C. Wall-hung, solid surface, multistation lavatory units. D. Shower receptors. E. Showers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards- 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010. B. ASME Al12.6.1M - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use 1997 (Reaffirmed 2017). C. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings 2018, with Errata. D. ASME Al 12.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures 2018, with Errata. E. ASME Al 12.19.5 - Flush Valves and Spuds for Water Closets, Urinals, and Tanks 2022. F. ASSE 1014- Performance Requirements for Backflow Prevention Devices for Hand-Held Showers 2020. G. ASSE 1070- Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices 2020. H. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. co I. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects 2022, with Errata. N J. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components- Lead Content 2022. N N K. UL (DIR)-Online Certifications Directory Current Edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS w A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. o B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, D trim, and finishes. U) C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on-site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable codes for installation of plumbing systems. B. Comply with UL (DIR) requirements. C. Perform work in accordance with local health department regulations. D. Provide certificate of compliance from Authority Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of installation. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 4000 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.03 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets: 1. Vitreous china, ASME Al 12.19.2, wall hung, siphon jet flush action, china bolt caps. 2. Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.2; see architectural details for mounting heights with elongated rim. 3. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 4. Flush Operation: Sensor operated, hardwired. 5. Manufacturers: a. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle. b. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com/#sle. c. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. B. Flush Valves: 1. Flush valve shall be diaphragm type. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com/#sle. b. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 3. Sensor-Operated: a. Type: ASME Al 12.19.5; chloramine-resistant clog-resistant dual-seat diaphragm valve complete with vacuum breaker, stops and accessories. b. Mechanism: Solenoid-operated piston or electronic motor-actuated operator with low-voltage powered infrared sensor, and mechanical override or override push button. c. Wall mounted concealed sensor. d. Supplied Volume Capacity: 1.6 gal per flush. co N C. Toilet Seats: o N 1. Plastic: White finish, open front, enlongated shape, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, N brass bolts, without cover. N D. Water Closet Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: w a. Grohe America, Inc: www.grohe.com/us/#sle. Q 0 b. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com/#sle. w c. JOSAM Company: www.josam.com/#sle. D U) d. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. Ln e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2. ASME Al 12.6.1 M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.04 WALL HUNG URINALS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Standard, Inc: www.americanstandard-us.com/#sle. 2. Kohler Company: www.kohler.com/#sle. 3. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Vitreous china, ASME Al 12.19.2, wall hung with side shields and concealed carrier. 1. Consumption Volume: 1.0 gal per flush, maximum. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 3. Flush Operation: Sensor operated. 4. Trapway Outlet: Integral. C. Flush Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Sloan Valve Company: www.sloanvalve.com/#sle. b. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2. Sensor-Operated: Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 4000 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation a. Type: ASME Al 12.19.5; chloramine-resistant, clog-resistant dual-seat diaphragm valve with vacuum breaker, stops and accessories. b. Mechanism: Solenoid-operated piston or electronic motor-actuated operator with low-voltage powered infrared sensor, and mechanical override button. c. Supplied Volume Capacity: 0.25 gal per flush. 3. Concealed Type: Rough brass, exposed parts chrome-plated, wall escutcheon, wheel handle stop. D. Urinal Carriers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jrsmith.com/#sle. b. JOSAM Company: www.josam.com/#sle. c. Zurn Industries, LLC: www.zurn.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2. ASME Al 12.6.1 M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. 2.05 WALL-HUNG, SOLID SURFACE, MULTISTATION LAVATORY UNITS A. Description: Rectilinear, level-surface deck, seamless and integral elongated basin, with stainless steel enclosed pedestal cabinet. B. Deck and Bowl Material: Fabricate from molded engineered stone material consisting of natural quartz, granite, and other minerals in a matrix of thermoset acrylic modified bio-based polyester resin and meeting requirements of IAPMO Z124. C. Surface Burning Characteristics: Smoke developed index less than 450, and flame spread index less than 25, Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. D. Number of Wash Stations: One, Two or Three, vandal resistant type. co E. Soap Dispenser: Integrated. Provide deck mounted soap bottle fill system o N F. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. N G. Faucet Drilling: 4 inch (100 mm)centerset drilling. N H. Sensor-Operated Faucets: w 1. High profile metering faucet with infrared and external temperature control. Q 2. Vandal-resistant meeting requirements of ASME Al 12.18.1 and ADA Standards o compliant. w 3. Body: Polished, chrome-plated commercial solid cast brass, with 4 inch (102 mm) U) centerset mounting with anti-rotation trim plate. 4. Tempered Water Supply: ADA Standards compliant lever on faucet body. 5. Aerator: Flow rate of 0.5 gpm at 20 to 80 psi operating range. 6. Sensor Module: Water conserving, vandal-resistant adjustable sensor unit with timing turn-off delay and stationary object automatic timed cutoff, with battery diagnostic light, serviceable from above deck. 7. Power Supply: 6 VDC lithium battery and single 115 VAC plug-in adapter. 8. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: a. ASSE 1070 listed with combination stop, strainer, and check valves, and flexible stainless steel connectors. I. Hand Dryer: Intergrated J. Access Panel: Stainless steel. K. Support Frame: Wall-mounted, heavy gauge, stainless steel. L. Accessories: 1. Ball valve stops 2. Flexible supplies 3. Chrome plated brass trap 2.06 SHOWER RECEPTORS A. White Acrylic, fiberglass reinforced with slip-resistance base, ADA complaint. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed index of 450 or less, Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 4000 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2.07 SHOWERS A. Wall Mounted Shower Valve: 1. Comply with ASME Al 12.18.1. 2. Provide two-handle, in-wall diverter valve body with integral thermostatic mixing valve to supply 1.5 gpm. B. Shower Head: 1. ASME Al 12.18.1; chrome-plated vandal-proof institutional head with integral wall bracket, built-in 1.5 gpm flow control. C. Hand-Held Shower Head: 1. ASME Al 12.18.1, adjustable spray hand-held shower head with swivel fitting with ASSE 1014 backflow preventer. 2. Include 60 inch minimum flexible polished stainless steel hose and in-line vacuum breaker 3. Provide bracket on vertical grab bar to mount hand spray, allowing use of the unit as either a hand-held spray or a fixed shower head. 4. Provide diverter valve, located and mounted to meet ADA requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome-plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons. co N C. Install components level and plumb. C) N D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. w 3.04 PROTECTION o A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. LU B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. U) U) C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 22 4000 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 23 0010 BASIC MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Mechanical HVAC Contract shall also include furnishing and installing a complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning system for the building and all other related work as called for under the specifications and shown on plans. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The Mechanical HVAC Contract shall include all work under the listed Division 23 of the Specifications Index and all related Mechanical work as shown on the Drawings for the project. B. A Complete table of Mechanical Reference Symbols is shown on the plans. C. Under this Contract the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two 3-ring binders and a PDF of all pertinent systems' related documents stored on a soild state external hard drive or a single flash drive. Submit a single, organized PDF to the Engineer for review. After review is complete, contractor shall turn information provided over to the Owner. The binders and PDF shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Test and Balance Reports. o D. The Mechanical installation to be made under Division 23 is set up for contract bidding as follows:" 1. Mechanical HVAC Contractor is a sub-contractor to the General Contractor. `V a. The Mechanical contractor is responsible for own equipment, such as cranes, lifts, w etc. in order to provide a complete installation of mechanical systems. b. The Mechanical contractor shall be a sub-contractor to the General Contractor and o shall include in his bid, prices from sub-contractors for control wiring, and other w trades necessary to complete the entire job. U) U) 1.04 SPECIFICATIONS COMPLIANCE A. The requirements of these specifications shall be complied with in every respect. Therefore, it shall be absolutely mandatory that the job foreman, all lead mechanics, subcontractors and their foreman have completely studied these specifications, be completely knowledgeable as to their entire contents, and maintain a copy at the job-site. Failure to comply with this requirement will be reason to presume the mechanic or subcontractor is not in responsible charge of his work due to ignorance of job requirements, and will be reason for the owner to require dismissal and replacement with approved personnel. Every foreman and lead mechanic shall be provided with a complete copy of this specification. 1.05 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation without change in the contract sum. 1.06 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. The following work is not included as part of the Contract. 1. The removal and storage of any equipment in the building required to be moved or relocated during the construction process. 1.07 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS A. The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0010 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. All permits necessary for a complete heating and ventilation installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. C. Except in those municipalities which provide state- approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical equipment wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of Electricity. Allowance shall be made in the bid and contract for the cost of such inspection. 1. Fees for such inspection will be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be provided by the Contractor with his Request for Payment. 1.08 REFERENCES A. All equipment, piping, etc., shall be new and shall be installed to meet the approval of the following additional ordinances: ASME Rules for Pressure Tanks, National Board of Fire Underwriter's Rules, American Waterworks and the American Gas Association. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 3000. B. Products Scheduled on the Drawings by Naming one Manufacturer, but not Indicating Other Approved Manufactures in the Specifications: Use any equivalent product complying with the specifications in general and equivalent to the"Basis of Design" identified in the drawing's schedules. Pre-bid substitutions are not required in this situation. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. D. All documents shall be submitted in .pdf format unless pre-approved by Engineer. The contractor shall not use any equipment or materials that does not have the engineer's stamped approval. E. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. N 0 1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS N A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. N 1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. Q 1.12 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION o w A. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which D cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. U) B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the ArchitecUEngineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. E. The Contractor shall consider and review the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as his complete set. He will be responsible for any and all mechanical work shown or stated (to be by him), to include this work in his bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Mechanical section of the plans and specifications. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for continual coordination of the mechanical work with other trades so as to avoid conflicts in installation. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades to assure that construction proceeds in an orderly and timely manner. B. Study the civil, structural, electrical, shop and any specialty drawings and specifications to determine required coordination. Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0010 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports that may be required for the mechanical work shall be furnished and installed under the same division of the specifications as the respective items to be supported. Excluded from this requirement are cast in place anchor bolts. 2. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors and walls as specified will be provided by the various trades in their respective materials, but the trade requiring them shall see that they are properly located in zones provided or otherwise approved by the Engineer or Architect and/or Owner. 3. Locations of pipes, panels, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate interferences encountered. The Project Coordinator shall determine the exact rerouting and location of each pipe and/or duct encountered prior to fabrication. a. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. 4. Installation of Arrangement: The contractor shall install all mechanical work to permit removal of, and access to, (without damage to other parts) all parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. C. Layout Priority: 1. All trades shall understand that other trades will need to work in the same areas during the project. All final decisions as to the right-of-way and runs of utility lines (pipes, ducts, etc.) shall be made by Owner and/or Architect. In general, priority shall be given as follows: a. Process piping which must be drainable b. Sheet metal ductwork c. Light Fixtures N d. Plumbing sanitary, storm, and vent lines N e. Sprinkler piping f. Gravity water lines N g. Hyrdonic or steam lines Lu h. Refrigerant lines i. Gas and air lines Q 0 j. Plumbing water w k. Electrical conduit U) D. PREPARE DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS WHERE NECESSARY TO ASSURE PROPER FIT Ln AND NECESSARY CLEARANCE. 1.14 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FIRESTOPPING A. The Mechanical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for their Work. B. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by the Mechanical Contractor. C. All patching shall be done by Mechanical Contractor. D. All cutting of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons, or their normal concealing construction, if such unsightly conditions occur, Mechanical Contractor will be required, at their own expense, to replace the damaged construction. E. This Mechanical Contractor shall provide and install firestopping materials per Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.15 ACCESS PANELS REQUIRED BY TRADE A. Trade requiring access shall provide and install access panels where not shown or specified. B. The finished appearance and function will be subject to approval by the Architect/Owner. C. Provide panels that accommodate adjacent finishes in finished spaces. D. Access panels shall meet all code requirements for each location they are installed and shall be sized appropriately. 1.16 ELECTRICAL Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0010 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish all motor starters and motor controls and provide all wiring for motor control operation, except if specified otherwise. 1.17 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COSTS A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment for specified units, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical installation costs for this substitution whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the specification or was approved equal after the project was in the bidding process. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from date of final substantial completion. 1.19 PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS A. If a specification section does not include a list of approved manufacturers, that section is open to all manufacturers who meet the section's specified requirements. Substitution requests are not required for any manufacturers. B. If a specification section does include a list of manufacturers, that list is all pre-approved manufacturers for that section. Substitution requests will be required for any alternative manufacturers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NOT USED co N END OF SECTION N N N r W Q 0 W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0010 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 23 0050 SELECTIVE MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The Front End Sections, General Requirements, Special Requirements, Division 1 and other applicable specifications included in the project manual form a part of the Mechanical specification and shall have the same force as if it was printed in this section. B. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular, such reference shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the installation. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. HVAC demolition. B. Removal of existing piping, ductwork and equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Regulatory Agencies and Code requirements. B. Reference Standards - Comply with the following: 1. Safety Requirements for Demolition -ANSI A 10.6. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations - NFPA 241. 3. US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 4. The Federal Register- Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants -40 CFR-81. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 0010 Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements. co PART 2 PRODUCTS N 2.01 MATERIALS N A. Materials used for patching and finishing shall be of the same quality and texture as the adjacent undisturbed areas. Refer to 23 0010 Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements for w additional information regarding cutting, patching and finishing. Q B. Use fireproof materials according to 23 0010 Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements and o Division 7 for patching fire resistive construction. w D PART 3 EXECUTION U) 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide alteration and demolition of mechanical facilities as required by the drawings and specifications. B. Contractor shall remove all abandoned piping, ductwork, hangers, equipment within project limits whether shown on drawings or not. Existing ductwork and piping rendered abandoned after demolition of equipment shall be removed. C. Do not begin work until time schedules and manner of operations have been approved by the Owner's Representative. All interruptions of existing services shall be included in the Owner approved schedules, and so identified. Demolition shall follow the Mechanical and Electrical phasing plans. D. Verify the location of all related existing equipment, piping and other mechanical facilities. Provide for the removal, relocation, rerouting, and reconnecting of this work as required due to demolition methods or sequences employed. Obtain the Owner's permission prior to commencing any work. E. Comply with the installation procedures specified in the applicable specification sections in Division 23. F. Remove all support items associated with demolished equipment unless noted otherwise. G. Where existing equipment must remain in service during construction, provide rerouting and reconnecting of mechanical services as required to maintain continuous service. Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0050 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation H. Maintain system continuity and operation of piping or ductwork circuits, whether spliced, extended, relocated or newly constructed. Provide temporary piping and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. I. All ductwork and piping hangers, supports, anchors, etc., shall be removed along with all ductwork and piping shown to be removed. J. All refrigerant shall be recovered from refrigeration equipment prior to disposal. Removal of any equipment containing refrigerants shall be in accordance with all current directives pertaining to refrigerant disposal or reuse. K. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. L. Existing HVAC System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Obtain permission from Owner and Engineer at least one week before partially or completely disabling existing system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. M. Contractor shall pay for all fees for disposal of equipment. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that abandoned or removed apparatus and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. B. Demolition Drawings are based on non-destructive field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect and Engineer before disturbing existing installation. C. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING HVAC WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. co B. Remove abandoned piping and ductwork to source of supply. N C. Disconnect and remove existing apparatus and equipment where noted. N N D. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing HVAC installations, or as specified. w 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR o A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. w D END OF SECTION U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0050 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0593 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2021. B. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications 2013 (Reapproved 2019). C. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2023c. D. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Current Edition, Including All Revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. K value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. co 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. N 3. Maximum Water Vapor Absorption: 5.0 percent by weight. N C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure- w sensitive rubber-based adhesive. Q D. Indoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: o 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. D PART 3 EXECUTION U) 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Test ductwork for design pressure prior to applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Insulated Ducts Conveying Air Below Ambient Temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 3. Insulate entire system, including fittings,joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Supply Ducts: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation 1.5 inches thick. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 0713 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ducts. B. Flexible ducts. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 2023. B. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 2024. C. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems 2024. D. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible 2020. E. UL 181 -Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide UL Class 1 ductwork, fittings, hangers, supports, and appurtenances in accordance with NFPA 90A and SMACNA (DCS) guidelines unless stated otherwise. B. Provide metal duct unless otherwise indicated. Fibrous glass duct can be substituted at the Contractor's option. C. Duct Shape and Material in accordance with Allowed Static Pressure Range: o 1. Round: Plus or minus 2 in-wc of galvanized steel. N 2. Rectangular: Plus or minus 2 in-wc of galvanized steel. N N D. Duct Sealing and Leakage in accordance with Static Pressure Class: 1. Low Pressure Service: Up to 2 in-wc: w a. Seal: Class C, apply to seal off transverse joints. Q b. Leakage: 0 UJ E. Duct Fabrication Requirements: D 1. Duct and Fitting Fabrication and Support: SMACNA(DCS) including specifics for cU) continuously welded round and oval duct fittings. 2. Use reinforced and sealed sheet-metal materials at recommended gauges for indicated operating pressures or pressure class. 3. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide airfoil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. 4. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated. 5. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. 6. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when an acoustical lining is required. 7. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. 2.02 METAL DUCTS 2.03 METAL DUCTS A. Material Requirements: 1. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating. Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 3100 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Round Metal Ducts: 1. Round Connection System: Interlocking duct connection system in accordance with SMACNA(DCS). C. Round Spiral Duct: 1. Round spiral lock seam duct with galvanized steel outer wall. D. Connectors, Fittings, Sealants, and Miscellaneous: 1. Fittings: Manufacture with solid inner wall of perforated galvanized steel. 2. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA"E" rated rigid class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Flexible Air Ducts: 1. UL 181, Class 1, polyethylene film supported by helically wound spring steel wire. 2. Pressure Rating: From 10 in-wc to 5 in-wc negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 5,500 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 250 degrees F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). B. Comply with safety standards NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering the ductwork system. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; co maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence N downstream. N E. Duct sizes indicated are precise inside dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. N F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and w maintenance activities. Q G. Provide access doors for access to coils and fire dampers. 0 UJ END OF SECTION D Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 3100 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct access doors. B. Volume control dampers. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 2024. B. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible 2020. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) and as indicated. 2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Single Blade Dampers: 1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 by 30 inch. 2. Blade: 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch, minimum. B. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. PART 3 EXECUTION co 3.01 INSTALLATION No N A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow N SMACNA(DCS). See Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. C14 B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as Lu indicated. Provide minimum 8 by 8 inch size access door for hand and shoulder access, or as o indicated on drawings. Provide minimum 4 by 4 inch size access door for balancing dampers w only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D C. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of L whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. FEND OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 3300 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SMACNA (ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 2012. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Provide rectangular and square formed adjustable, backpan stamped, core removable, and multi-louvered ceiling diffusers constructed to maintain 360 degree discharge air pattern. B. Connections: Round. C. Frame: Provide surface mount and inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. D. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish. 2.02 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Ceiling grille with an automatic balancing damper. 1. Basis of Design: Ruskin ABD-SEA-ST 2. Aluminum grille, fixed blades, white finish, galvanized steel register box, side tap with N regulation control. N PART 3 EXECUTION N 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. w B. Comply with SMACNA(ASMM)for flashing/counter-flashing of roof penetrations and supports p for roof curbs and roof mounted equipment. w D C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to comply with U) architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black, see Section 09 9123. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Replace, repair, or touch-up damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 23 3700 - Page 1 of 1 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 0010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The Electrical Contract Installation shall include a complete Electrical Installation for the project. All conduit, fixtures and equipment herein specified, mentioned or shown on Drawings, shall be furnished and installed in place, connected up and ready for normal operation except for such items as are specifically mentioned to be furnished by others. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED: A. The Electrical Contract shall include all work under the listed Sections of the Specifications Index and all related Electrical work as shown on the Drawings for the project. B. A Complete table of Electrical Reference Symbols is shown on the plans. C. Under this Contract the Electrical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a USB flash drive and PDF set of all pertinent systems related documents. The documents shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Control drawings for any systems not furnished under other contracts. co D. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for own equipment, such as cranes, lifts, etc. in order to N provide a complete installation of Electrical systems. N E. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for contacting the utility company and coordinating the c14 power connection for the building service. Include all costs in bid. F. Branch feeders, branch wiring, receptacles, special outlets, switches, light fixtures, dimmers, contactors, starters, timers, etc., as shown on the plans or required for operation of the Q electrical system. o G. A fire alarm system, including all conduit and wiring, manual pull stations, audio/visual warning U) alarms, smoke detectors, and fire alarm panel with annunciator. Ln H. Repair of all damage done to the premises as a result of the installation and removal of all debris or surplus material left by those engaged in the work. 1.04 SPECIFICATIONS COMPLIANCE A. The requirements of these specifications shall be complied with in every respect. Therefore, it shall be absolutely mandatory that the job foreman, all lead electricians, subcontractors and their foreman have completely studied these specifications, be completely knowledgeable as to their entire contents, and maintain a copy at the job-site. Failure to comply with this requirement will be reason to presume the electrician or subcontractor is not in responsible charge of their work due to ignorance of job requirements, and will be reason for the Owner to require dismissal and replacement with approved personnel. Every foreman and lead mechanic shall be provided with a complete copy of this specification. 1.05 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation without change in the contract sum. 1.06 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS: A. The Electrical Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. All permits necessary for a complete electrical installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. B. Except in those municipalities which provide state-approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical equipment wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of Electricity. Allowance Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0010 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation shall be made in the bid and contract for the cost of such inspection. C. Fees for such inspection will be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be provided by the Contractor with the Request for Payment. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1.08 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit shop drawings and product data of related systems, products, and accessories. C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.11 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION: A. This Contractor shall coordinate their work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and o electrical plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original N plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. w D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or Q between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the o Architect/Engineer for a decision. w D E. The Contractor shall consider and review the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, U) Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as a complete set. They will be responsible for any and all electrical work shown or stated (to be by the Contractor), to include this work in their bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Electrical section of the plans and specifications. F. The drawings are indicative of the work to be installed, but do not show all bends, fittings, boxes and specialties required to complete the installation. G. All conduits, wires, outlets boxes, switches, receptacles, devices and fixtures shall be included in the work. H. Where it is stated that the Contractor shall "provide" a device or piece of equipment, it shall mean that such a device or equipments are finished and installed. 1.12 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FIRESTOPPING: A. The Electrical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for their Work. B. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. C. All patching shall be done by Electrical Contractor. D. All conduit and outlet installations and cutting of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons, or their normal concealing construction, if such unsightly conditions occur, Electrical Contractor will be required, at their own expense, to replace the damaged construction. E. This Electrical Contractor shall provide and install firestopping materials per Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0010 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1.13 SCAFFOLDING: A. Furnish and erect all scaffolding, ladders, etc., required in the installation of wiring, equipment and fixtures. 1.14 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COSTS: A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment for specified units, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical installation costs for this substitution whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the specification or was approved equal after the project was in the bidding process. 1.15 GUARANTEE: A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from date of final substantial completion. PART 2 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Provide necessary power wiring for equipment furnished by others. Verify requirements with the Contractors responsible to supply each piece of equipment. Provide heavy duty disconnect switches as indicated. 3.02 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: A. Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all deviations from contract drawings and specifications. Edits shall neatly and correctly enter in colored crayon any deviations on drawings affected, and shall keep drawings available for inspection. Extra set of drawings will co be furnished for this purpose. N B. At the completion of the job, and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide a N complete set of as-built drawings. The Contractor shall show locations for all major electrical devices, including panelboards and all major runs of conduit, the circuiting of each fixture, outlet, etc., shall be shown. Certify to the accuracy of each print, by signature thereon, and Lu deliver same to Architect. Q 0 END OF SECTION w D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0010 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 0505 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. D. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. N Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. N 1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Notify local fire service. c14 3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance. 4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK p A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. D B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. Ln C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Use materials to match fire rating of wall. D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0505 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused. C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0505 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Metal-clad cable. C. Wiring connectors. D. Electrical tape. E. Heat shrink tubing. F. Wire pulling lubricant. G. Cable ties. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 -Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2013 (Reapproved 2018). B. ASTM B8 -Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, N Medium-Hard, or Soft 2023. N C. ASTM B33- Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical N Purposes 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020). "' D. ASTM 13787/13787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper w Conductors for Subsequent Insulation 2004 (Reapproved 2020). Q E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic 0 Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape 2017. D U) F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Ln Insulating Rubber Tapes 2020. G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy 2021. I. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems 2021. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 44 -Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 83 -Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 267- Outline of Investigation for Wire-Pulling Compounds Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 486A-4868 -Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 486C- Splicing Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 1569- Metal-Clad Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0519 - Page 1 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 PRODUCTS co 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS o N A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. N B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted. p D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted. D E. Service entrance cable is not permitted. U) F. Armored cable is not permitted. G. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows: 1. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used: a. Where exposed to damage. b. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for those locations. c. For isolated ground circuits, d. For patient care areas of health care facilities requiring redundant grounding. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0519 - Page 2 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM 13787/13787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. H. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. I. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. o 3) Phase C: Blue. N 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. N d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color Lu code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Q 0 2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE w D A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. U) B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. 2.04 METAL-CLAD CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. E. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0519 - Page 3 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation G. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location. 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-4868 or UL 486C as applicable. B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors. a. Push-in wire connectors are not permitted. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors. C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. 3. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors where connectors are required. D. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. E. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type. co 2.06 ACCESSORIES o N A. Electrical Tape: N 1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed c14 as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. Lu 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying o with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; w conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature D environment up to 221 degrees F. U) 3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber(EPR)tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service. 4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F. 5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all- weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil. B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: 1. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 267. 2. Suitable for use with conductors/cables and associated insulation/jackets to be installed. 3. Suitable for use at installation temperature. D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0519 - Page 4 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location indicated. 5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions: a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors. b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating. c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors. 7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch co circuit. N B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. N N C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). D. Installation in Raceway: w 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other o contaminants. w 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. D 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum U) pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. E. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. G. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. H. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. J. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0519 - Page 5 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. N. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of co tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. N O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using N materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. N P. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and w devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. Q 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 0 w A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. D U) B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. Ln END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0519 - Page 6 of 6 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode. N 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain N direction before proceeding with work. N 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. w B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a o Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having w jurisdiction. D U) PART 2 PRODUCTS Ln 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. E. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0526 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b. Metal gas piping. F. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding: 1. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination. a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise indicated or required. c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with co earth. o 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in N raceway). N C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors Lu and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. Q 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, w concealed and other inaccessible connections. D 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or U) exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. D. Ground Bars: 1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators. 2. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0526 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. C. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0526 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes. D. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2017. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware 2023. C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 2023. D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication 2004. co N E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. N F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. N 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS w A. Coordination: ~ Q 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with actual equipment and 0 components to be installed. D 2. Coordinate work to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. U) 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 4. Coordinate arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts. 5. Notify Architect of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has cured; see Section 03 3000. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: Organization recognized by OSHA as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0529 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 4. Steel Components: Use corrosion-resistant materials suitable for environment where installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M or ASTM Al 53/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps and clamps suitable for conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers and brackets suitable for boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel/Strut Framing Systems: 1. Description: Factory-fabricated, continuous-slot, metal channel/strut and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field assembly of supports. 2. Comply with MFMA-4. E. Hanger Rods: Threaded, zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use anchor and fastener types indicated for specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. co 6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. N 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. N 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted. 10. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel/strut and spot inserts specifically w designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. o a. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel/strut framing system. w b. Comply with MFMA-4. D c. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. U) 11. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES)for compliance with applicable building code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install hangers and supports in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable. D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0529 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation H. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal, fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel/strut to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel/strut secured to studs to support equipment surface mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel/strut to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized concrete pad 4 inches in height; see Section 03 3000. 5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. J. Secure fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommended torque settings. K. Remove temporary supports. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. E. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. co 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. o 2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members." F. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with N adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. w H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 p inch off wall. w D I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed U) in hollow partitions. — END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0529 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 0533.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. Galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC). C. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). D. Flexible metal conduit(FMC). E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). F. Galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. H. Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit(RTRC). I. High-density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits. B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding. D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. co 0 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS N A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC)2020. `V N r B. ANSI C80.3 -American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S) 2020. w C. ANSI C80.6 -American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit 2018. Q D. ASTM F2160- Standard Specification for Solid Wall High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) o Conduit Based on Controlled Outside Diameter(OD)2016. D E. ASTM F2176- Standard Specification for Mechanical Couplings Used on Polyethylene U) Conduit, Duct and Innerduct 2017. F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. G. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT) 2020. H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC)2017. I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2014. J. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Metal Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2018. K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit 2020. L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 2021. M. NEMA TC 7 -Solid-Wall Coilable and Straight Electrical Polyethylene Conduit 2021. N. NEMA TC 14 (SERIES)- Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings Series 2015. O. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. P. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 1 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation S. UL 514A- Metallic Outlet Boxes Current Edition, Including All Revisions. T. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions. U. UL 651 -Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions. V. UL 651A- Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit Current Edition, Including All Revisions. W. UL 797- Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. X. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Y. UL 2419- Outline of Investigation for Electrically Conductive Corrosion Resistant Compounds Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with actual type and quantity of conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, and other potential conflicts. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment. 4. Coordinate work to provide roof penetrations that preserve integrity of roofing system and do not void roof warranty. 5. Notify Architect of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit between co termination points is complete. No 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE N A. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: Organization recognized by OSHA as Nationally c14 Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Q A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's o instructions. w D PART 2 PRODUCTS U) 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70, manufacturer's instructions, and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use conduit types indicated for specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or high-density polyethylene (HDPE)conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or high-density polyethylene (HDPE)conduit. 3. Where rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or schedule 80 rigid PVC conduit where emerging from underground. 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2-inch (53 mm)trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) elbows, galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC) elbows, PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC)elbows, or concrete-encased PVC elbows for bends. D. Embedded Within Concrete: 1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 2 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted. 3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC). 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT)where emerging from concrete. E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or aluminum rigid metal conduit. I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: co a. Where exposed below 12 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or N closets. b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas. N K. Exposed, Exterior, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical w metallic tubing (EMT). o L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized w steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or Schedule 40 PVC. D M. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use aluminum rigid metal conduit. Ln N. Flexible Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC). 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet. O. Flexible Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit(FMC). 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 CONDUIT -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Provide conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for complete raceway system. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended. D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm)trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm)trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch ( 21 mm)trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm)trade size. 5. Underground, Interior: 1 inch (27 mm)trade size. 6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm)trade size. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 3 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube &Conduit, a division of Atkore International: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Nucor Tubular Products: www.nucortubular.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. Emerson Electric Co; O-Z/Gedney: www.emerson.com/#sle. 2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B or UL 6. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless fittings, including set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted. 2.04 GALVANIZED STEEL INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit, a division of Atkore International: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Nucor Tubular Products: www.nucortubular.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with co ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242. N C. Fittings: N 1. Manufacturers: C" a. Bridgeport Fittings, LLC: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. Emerson Electric Co; O-Z/Gedney: www.emerson.com/#sle. Q 2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled p as complying with UL 514B or UL 1242. w 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. U) 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless fittings, including Ln set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted. 2.05 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT(RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil, 0.040 inch. D. PVC-Coated Boxes and Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed. 2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use boxes and fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514A, UL 5148, or UL 6. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil, 0.040 inch. E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil, 0.015 inch. 2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, a division of Atkore International: www.afcweb.com/#sle. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 4 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sIe. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard-wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings, LLC: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. Emerson Electric Co; O-Z/Gedney: www.emerson.com/#sle. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, a division of Atkore International: www.afcweb.com/#sle. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sIe. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC)jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.08 GALVANIZED STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) co A. Manufacturers: N 1. Allied Tube & Conduit, a division of Atkore International: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. N 2. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. c14 B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing complying with w ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. Q C. Fittings: o 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with D UL 5148. U) 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression/gland or set-screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 4. Embedded Within Concrete, Where Permitted: Use fittings listed as concrete-tight. Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are acceptable. 2.09 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. B. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 2.10 REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT(RTRC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit complying with NEMA TC 14 (SERIES). B. Supports: As recommended by manufacturer. C. Fittings: Same type and manufacturer as conduit to be connected. 2.11 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) CONDUIT Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 5 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Description: NFPA 70, Type HDPE high-density polyethylene solid-wall conduit complying with ASTM F2160 and NEMA TC 7; list and label as complying with UL 651A; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated. B. Joining Methods: Approved by HDPE conduit manufacturer. C. Mechanical Fittings: Comply with ASTM F2176; list and label as complying with UL 651A. 2.12 ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive compound listed as complying with UL 2419; suitable for use with conduit to be installed. B. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. C. Epoxy Adhesive for RTRC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. D. Sealing Compound for Hazardous/Classified Location Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with particular fittings to be installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in accordance with NECA 1. o C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. N D. Install intermediate metal conduit(IMC) in accordance with NECA 101. c14 E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC) using only tools approved by manufacturer. w F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)conduit in accordance with NECA 111. o G. Conduit Routing: D 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. U) 2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms. c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. 5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical. 6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between pull points. 8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 11. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 6 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 12. Group parallel conduits in same area on common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by authorities having jurisdiction; see Section 26 0529. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 5. Use metal channel/strut with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel/strut with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. 8. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. I. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock co nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. C) N 6. Provide insulating bushings, insulated throats, or listed metal fittings with smooth, rounded edges at conduit terminations to protect conductors. N 7. Secure joints and connections to provide mechanical strength and electrical continuity. J. Penetrations: w 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and Q grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. Lu 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. D U) 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set cn sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 6. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. 7. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements; see Section 07 8400. K. Underground Installation: 1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches. b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab. 2. Provide underground warning tape along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased; see Section 26 0553. L. Telecommunications Conduit: 1. Provide 1" empty conduit with proper mud ring or box stubbed up into corridor ceiling space for all voice, data, and television locations. M. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated; see Section 03 3000. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 7 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation N. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 4. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. O. Conduit Sealing: 1. Use foam conduit sealant to prevent entry of moisture and gases. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Where conduits enter building from outside. b. Where service conduits enter building from underground distribution system. c. Where conduits enter building from underground. d. Where conduits may transport moisture to contact live parts. 2. Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, use foam conduit sealant at accessible point near penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. b. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. 3. Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous/classified locations, provide identified/listed sealing fittings or conduit mechanical seals as approved by authorities having jurisdiction; locate as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70. co P. Provide grounding and bonding; see Section 26 0526. N 3.03 CLEANING N N A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. END OF SECTION w Q 0 LU D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 8 of 8 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 26 0533.16 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 08 3100 -Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2016. C. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum) 2020. D. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable 2014. E. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 2013 co (Reaffirmed 2020). N 0 CIA F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. N G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Lu H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, o Including All Revisions. w I. UL 508A- Industrial Control Panels Current Edition, Including All Revisions. U) J. UL 514A- Metallic Outlet Boxes Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush- mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. co 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. N 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where N required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. w 7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. Q 8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 0 514A. w 9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL U) 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted. 12. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 4. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. E. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. F. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. G. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 3100 as required where approved by the Architect. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 6. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. H. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other co than boxes used for fixture support)supported by threaded conduit connections in N accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. N 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. w I. Install boxes plumb and level. o J. Flush-Mounted Boxes: w 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so U) that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface U) more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. K. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. L. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. N. Close unused box openings. O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. Q. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Warning signs and labels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. B. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Arc flash hazard warning labels. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z535.2 -American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017). B. ANSI Z535.4-American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 969- Marking and Labeling Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE co A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. N PART 2 PRODUCTS N 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not w already identified in accordance with specified requirements. Q B. Identification for Equipment: 0 w 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control D equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. U) a. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. 4) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces. b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2) Identify load(s) served. Include location. 2. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70. 3. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size. 4. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text"FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT'. 5. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following. a. Service equipment. b. Industrial control panels. c. Motor control centers. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0553 - Page 1 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation d. Elevator control panels. e. Industrial machinery. 6. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent. C. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. D. Identification for Devices: 1. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices. 2. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. 3. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, where permitted. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non- co conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. o 3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. N 4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser- etched text. ' 5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch Q high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. o B. Identification Labels: w 1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and U) abrasion resistant. 2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: a. Equipment designation or other approved description. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch. 5. Color: a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0553 - Page 2 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. B. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs. 2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners. 3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self- adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and o maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: N 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. N 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. w 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. Q 0 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. w 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. D U) 7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. Ln 8. Devices: Outside face of cover. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws. G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0553 - Page 3 of 3 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 0583 WIRING CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020). B. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications 2021. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE co A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. N B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. N N C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having w jurisdiction. Q PART 2 PRODUCTS 0 UJ 2.01 MATERIALS D U) A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for Ln equipment. 1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13. D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0533.16. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0583 - Page 1 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION co N O N N N r W Q O W D U) Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0583 - Page 2 of 2 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Occupancy sensors. B. Lighting contactors. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 25 3626 - Integrated Automation Lighting Relays. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches, wall dimmers, and fan speed controllers. 1. Includes finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section. G. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C136.10 -American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment- Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles - Physical and Electrical co Interchangeability and Testing 2023. No B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. N C. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2016. c14 D. NEMA ICS 5- Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices 2017. w E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Q Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. o Lu F. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D U) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Ln A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings. 3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0923 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Field Quality Control Reports. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, co hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system. N 2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS N A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle. w 2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com/#sle. 3. Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com/#sle. o 4. WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com/#sle. w D 5. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained U) from a single supplier. B. All Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated. 2. Sensor Technology: a. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves. 3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units. 4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval. 5. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes. 6. Sensitivity: Field adjustable. 7. Compatibility (Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low- voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum load requirements. C. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0923 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed-off time interval. c. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ultrasonic Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 400 square feet. D. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors: 1. General Requirements: a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated dimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed as complying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled. c. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR)Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet. E. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation. co b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, N provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. c. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or N automatic on/off. d. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated. w 2. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Q a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 square o feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. w D F. Directional Occupancy Sensors: U) 1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage. a. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. G. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings. 3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Auxiliary Contacts: 1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5. 2. Provide number and type of contacts indicated or required to perform necessary functions, including holding (seal-in) circuit and interlocking, plus one normally open (NO) and one normally closed (NC) spare contact for each lighting contactor, minimum. B. Pilot Devices: 1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5; heavy-duty type. 2. Pushbuttons: Unless otherwise indicated, provide momentary, non-illuminated type with flush button operator; normally open or normally closed as indicated or as required. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0923 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3. Selector Switches: Unless otherwise indicated, provide maintained, non-illuminated type with knob operator; number of switch positions as indicated or as required. 4. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test type unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide LED lamp source for indicating lights and illuminated devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices. F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship)and, where co applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless N otherwise indicated. N B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for N installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. Lu C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to 0 branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. w D E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place. U) F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 2726. G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. I. Occupancy Sensor Locations: 1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices. 2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers. J. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location. K. Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface with lighting control devices or associated power packs. L. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does not turn off power pack. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0923 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects. C. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect. C. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal coverage as required. D. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. See Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements for commissioning requirements. 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES co A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. N B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements. N C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices. w 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with Q additional training materials as required. 2. Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of D the installed lighting control devices. U) 3. Location: At project site. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 0923 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service 2013e, with Amendment (2017). B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards 2015. D. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum) 2020. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards 2011. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 1000 Volts or Less 2023. co G. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment N And Systems 2021. N H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. Lu I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current Edition, Including All Revisions. o J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current Edition, D Including All Revisions. U) K. UL 67 - Panelboards Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 489- Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 1699-Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush- mounted panelboards where indicated. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2416 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING co A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions N and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. w C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to Q panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 0 Lu PART 2 PRODUCTS D U) 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. D. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 PANELBOARDS -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2416 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. J. Load centers are not acceptable. c, N 2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS N A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and N features as indicated on the drawings. Lu B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper p conductors. w 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. U) C. Bussing: — 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 3. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2416 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Copper suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. 5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 6. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL o 943, class A for protection of personnel. N b. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter(AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Combination type listed as complying with UL 1699. N 7. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. Lu 8. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL o A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. D U) PART 3 EXECUTION U) 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. F. Install panelboards plumb. G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2416 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation I. Provide minimum of three spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor. J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories. L. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are not required. D. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. E. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. F. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.05 CLEANING co A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's N instructions. N B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. c14 END OF SECTION Lu Q 0 w D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2416 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation This page intentionally left blank N O N N N r W Q O W U) U) SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Wall plates and covers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting, including occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596- Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for 2014h, with Amendments (2017). B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification) 2014g, with Amendment(2017). C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015. D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2016. E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020). F. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications 2021. co G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having N Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. N H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 498-Attachment Plugs and Receptacles Current Edition, Including All Revisions. w J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices Current Edition, Including All o Revisions. LU K. UL 943- Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS L A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2726 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens. F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated. B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Gray with stainless steel wall plate. C. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate. 2.03 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 2. Pass &Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. co B. Wall Switches- General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches N with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20and where applicable FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. c14 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. w C. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated p standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single w pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the U) drawings. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Receptacles- General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498and where applicable FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFCI Receptacles: Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2726 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 1. GFCI Receptacles- General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type. 3. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 2.05 WALL PLATES AND COVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4. Pass &Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. D. Weatherproof Receptacle Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self- closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed. co N E. Weatherproof Receptacle Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged N lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in N use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. PART 3 EXECUTION ' Lu 3.01 EXAMINATION ~ Q A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. o Lu B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are U) properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor to top of box. b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor to top of box. c. Fan Speed Controllers: 48 inches above finished floor to top of box. d. Receptacles: 20 inches above finished floor to top of box or 6 inches above counter. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2726 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles or wall switches are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Unless otherwise indicated, GFCI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFCI protection. I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. J. Install wall switches with OFF position down. K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as co N instructed by manufacturer. o N L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally mounted `V receptacles with grounding pole on left. w N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely Q covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or o improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this D requirement. U) O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 2726 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C82.11 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 2023. B. IES LM-63 -Approved Method: IES Standard File Format for the Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information 2019. C. IES LM-79 -Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products 2019. D. IES LM-80 -Approved Method: Measuring Maintenance of Light Output Characteristics of Solid-State Light Sources 2021. E. NECA/IESNA 500- Standard for Installing Indoor Lighting Systems 2006. F. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems 2006. co G. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 2012 (Reaffirmed 2018). N H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having N Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. c14 I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Lu Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions. o K. UL 1598- Luminaires Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D U) L. UL 8750- Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products Current Edition, U) Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations. 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each fixture that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 5100 - Page 1 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. LED Luminaires: a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. 2. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IES LM-63 standard format upon request. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. Alternate light fixture data sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to bid. No exceptions. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s)and all sockets, co N ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and N protect the lamp and distribute the light. N E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, N connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. Lu F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any p damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. ui G. Recessed Luminaires: U) 1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4. — 2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials. 3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters. H. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. 2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. C. Battery: 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. D. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 5100 - Page 2 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation E. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. F. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s)to report test and diagnostic status. 2.04 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Exit signs complying with NFPA 101 and applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. 1. Number of Faces: Single-or double-face as indicated or as required for installed location. 2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for installed location. B. Self-Powered Exit Signs: 1. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source. 2. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate emergency operation. 3. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required. co D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to N luminaires. N E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. c14 3.02 INSTALLATION w A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. o B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D U) C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500 U) (commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. F. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires: 1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is certified as suitable to do so. 3. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners. 4. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional requirements. G. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage. H. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire. 2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for specified mounting height. I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. J. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 5100 - Page 3 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation K. Install lamps in each luminaire. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each product for damage and defects. C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation. D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply. E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place. B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed. co 3.07 SCHEDULE -SEE DRAWINGS N END OF SECTION" N r W Q O W D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 26 5100 - Page 4 of 4 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation SECTION 28 4600 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit. B. Transmitters for communication with supervising station. C. Circuits from protected premises to supervising station, including conduit. D. Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit indicated. E. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Materials and methods for work to be performed by this installer. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines current edition. B. ADA Standards- 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design 2010. C. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less)AC Power Circuits 2002 (Corrigendum 2012). D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring o Code or Reference Standard. N F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, N Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS w A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Q 0 B. Evidence of designer qualifications. w D C. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by U) authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and Ln description of operation: 1. Copy(if any)of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. 4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems. 5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with identifiers used in control unit programming. 6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop calculations. 7. List of all devices on each signaling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated. 8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams, installation instructions, and circuit length limitations. 9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery include calculations demonstrating adequate battery power. 10. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit. 11. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies with Contract Documents. 12. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with Contract Documents. 13. Do not show existing components to be removed. Project No. 23-29513 Section 28 4600 - Page 1 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation D. Evidence of installer qualifications. E. Inspection and Test Reports: 1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration. 2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests. 3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form,"filled out. F. Operating and Maintenance Data: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having jurisdiction. 2. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound or filed in same manuals. 3. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble call- back service. 4. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing. 5. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply. 6. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix. 7. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner. 8. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodeling. G. Project Record Documents: See Section 01 7800 for additional requirements; have one set available during closeout demonstration: 1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components, conduit, and zones. 2. "As installed"wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications. co 3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device, updated o input/output chart, and voice messages by event. H. Closeout Documents: `V N 1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with manufacturer's installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating Lu condition. Q 2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out completely and signed by installer and o authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction. D 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE U) A. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV(3 or 4)certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer , with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. 1. Authorized representative of control unit manufacturer; submit manufacturer's certification that installer is authorized; include name and title of manufacturer's representative making certification. 2. Installer Personnel: At least 2 years of experience installing fire alarm systems. 3. Supervisor: NICET level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician; furnish name and address. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Alarm Control Units and Accessories: 1. Existing system: Silent Knight by Honeywell. 2. Provide control units made by the same manufacturer. B. Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances: 1. Honeywell Security& Fire Solutions/Silent Knight: www.silentknight.com/#sle. Project No. 23-29513 Section 28 4600 - Page 2 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation 2. Provide initiating devices and notification appliances made by the same manufacturer, where possible. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1. For other acceptable manufacturers of control units specified, submit product data showing equivalent features and compliance with Contract Documents. 2. For substitution of products by manufacturers not listed, submit product data showing features and certification by Contractor that the design will comply with Contract Documents. 2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: 1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in Contract Documents or not. 2. Protected Premises: Entire building shown on drawings. 3. Comply with the following; where requirements conflict, order of precedence of requirements is as listed: a. ADA Standards. b. The requirements of the State Fire Marshal. c. The requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. d. Applicable local codes. e. Contract Documents (drawings and specifications). f. NFPA 101. g. NFPA 72; where the word "should" is used consider that provision mandatory; where conflicts between requirements require deviation from NFPA 72, identify deviations clearly on design documents. 4. Evacuation Alarm: Multiple smoke zones; allow for evacuation notification of any individual zone or combination of zones, in addition to general evacuation of entire o premises. N 5. Voice Notification: Provide emergency voice/alarm communications with multichannel capability; digital. N 6. General Evacuation Zones: Each smoke zone is considered a general evacuation zone unless otherwise indicated, with alarm notification in all zones on the same floor, on the w floor above, and the floor below. o 7. Program notification zones and voice messages as directed by Owner. w 8. Fire Command Center: Location indicated on drawings. D 9. Fire Alarm Control Unit: New, located at fire command center. U) B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1. Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station. 2. On-Premises Supervising Station: Existing proprietary station operated by Owner, located at 3. Remote Supervising Station: None. 4. Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded system. C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device Circuits (IDC): Class B, Style A. 2. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC)Within Single Building: Class B, Style 0.5. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B, Style W. D. Power Sources: 1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. 2. Secondary: Storage batteries. 3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. 4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 2.03 EXISTING COMPONENTS A. Existing Fire Alarm System: Remove existing components indicated and incorporate remaining components into new system, under warranty as if they were new; do not take existing portions of system out of service until new portions are fully operational, tested, and connected to existing system. Project No. 23-29513 Section 28 4600 - Page 3 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation B. On-Premises Supervising Station: Include as part of this work all modifications necessary to existing supervising station to accommodate new fire alarm work. C. Clearly label components that are "Not In Service." D. Remove unused existing components and materials from site and dispose of properly. 2.04 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water control valves. 2. Dry-pipe sprinkler system pressure. 3. Dry-pipe sprinkler valve room low temperature. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for the following: 1. Sprinkler water flow. 2.05 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are acceptable. 2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and maintenance data. B. Fire Alarm Control Units: Analog, addressable type; listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Master Control Unit: D. Initiating Devices: 1. Addressable Systems: a. Addressable Devices: Individually identifiable by addressable fire alarm control unit. co b. Provide suitable addressable interface modules as indicated or as required for N connection to conventional (non-addressable) devices and other components that provide a dry closure output. N E. Notification Appliances: Lu F. Circuit Conductors: Q 1. All cabling to be plenum rated. o 2. Copper or optical fiber; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label. w D G. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and U) NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. H. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. I. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station. 1. Frame: Stainless steel or aluminum with polycarbonate or glass cover. 2. Provide one for each control unit where operations are to be performed. 3. Obtain approval of Owner prior to mounting; mount in location acceptable to Owner. 4. Provide extra copy with operation and maintenance data submittal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and Contract Documents. B. All wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. 1. All wiring installed above ceilings to be free aired. 2. Exposed ceilings, wiring to be installed in conduit. C. All wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in unfinished areas 1. All wiring installed above ceilings to be free aired. D. See section 26 0533.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems. E. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. Project No. 23-29513 Section 28 4600 - Page 4 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation F. Install instruction cards and labels. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests. B. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. C. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments. D. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required. E. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing. F. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. G. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents. 3.03 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. 1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests. 2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. 3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration. 4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority having cry jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule demonstration. N 5. Repeat demonstration until successful. N END OF SECTION c14 w Q 0 w D U) Ln Project No. 23-29513 Section 28 4600 - Page 5 of 5 Waterloo Convention Center- Restroom Renovation co This page intentionally left bJank o N N N r W Q O W